You are on page 1of 2188

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System

V100R003C03

Configuration Guide (U2000)

Issue 04
Date 2013-11-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) About This Document

About This Document

Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

OptiX RTN 950 V100R003C03

iManager U2000 V100R006C00

Intended Audience
This document describes how to configure various services on the equipment. This document
describes the basic information and configuration process, and uses configuration examples to
show how to set specific parameters.

The intended audiences of this document are:

l Installation and commissioning engineer


l Data configuration engineer
l System maintenance engineer

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation


which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation


which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) About This Document

Symbol Description

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation


which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation


which, if not avoided, could result in
equipment damage, data loss, performance
deterioration, or unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not
related to personal injury.

Calls attention to important information, best


practices and tips.
NOTE is used to address information not
related to personal injury, equipment damage,
and environment deterioration.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles


are in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"


signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains
all updates made in previous issues.

Updates in Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C03


This is the fourth document issue for the V100R003C03 product version.

Section Description

- Fixed the known bugs.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) About This Document

Updates in Issue 03 (2012-03-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C03


This is the third document issue for the V100R003C03 product version.

Section Description

- Fixed the known bugs.

Updates in Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C03


This is the second document issue for the V100R003C03 product version.

Section Description

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on Added an example of configuring E-LAN


the Packet Plane services in end-to-end mode.

- Fixed the known bugs.

Updates in Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C03


This is the first document issue for the V100R003C03 product version.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) Contents

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii


1 Configuration Preparations.........................................................................................................1
1.1 Preparing Documents and Tools.....................................................................................................................................2
1.2 Checking Configuration Conditions...............................................................................................................................2

2 U2000 Quick Start..........................................................................................................................3


3 Specifying the Configuration Procedure..................................................................................4
4 Common Network Scenarios of Configuration Examples....................................................8
4.1 Common Network Scenario of the TDM Radio Network..............................................................................................9
4.2 Common Network Scenario of the IP Radio Network.................................................................................................12

5 Configuring the Network Topology........................................................................................17


5.1 Basic Concepts.............................................................................................................................................................18
5.1.1 DCN...........................................................................................................................................................................18
5.1.2 GNE and Non-GNE...................................................................................................................................................19
5.1.3 NE ID and NE IP Address.........................................................................................................................................19
5.1.4 Physical Boards and Logical Boards.........................................................................................................................20
5.1.5 Fiber/Cable Types......................................................................................................................................................21
5.1.6 Subnet........................................................................................................................................................................21
5.2 Configuration Procedure...............................................................................................................................................22
5.3 Configuration Example (TDM Radio Chain Network Topology)...............................................................................28
5.3.1 Networking Diagram.................................................................................................................................................28
5.3.2 Service Planning........................................................................................................................................................29
5.3.3 Configuration Process................................................................................................................................................30
5.4 Configuration Example (TDM Radio Ring Network Topology).................................................................................33
5.4.1 Networking Diagram.................................................................................................................................................33
5.4.2 Service Planning........................................................................................................................................................34
5.4.3 Configuration Process................................................................................................................................................35
5.5 Configuration Example (Hybrid Radio Chain Network).............................................................................................37
5.5.1 Networking Diagram.................................................................................................................................................37
5.5.2 Service Planning........................................................................................................................................................38
5.5.3 Configuration Process................................................................................................................................................38

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) Contents

5.6 Configuration Example (Hybrid Radio Ring Network)...............................................................................................40


5.6.1 Networking Diagram.................................................................................................................................................40
5.6.2 Service Planning........................................................................................................................................................41
5.6.3 Configuration Process................................................................................................................................................42
5.7 Configuration Example (Packet Network)...................................................................................................................44
5.7.1 Networking Diagram.................................................................................................................................................44
5.7.2 Service Planning........................................................................................................................................................46
5.7.3 Configuration Process................................................................................................................................................48

6 Configuring Radio Links...........................................................................................................52


6.1 Basic Concepts.............................................................................................................................................................53
6.1.1 Adaptive Modulation.................................................................................................................................................53
6.1.2 CCDP and XPIC........................................................................................................................................................54
6.1.3 RF Configuration Modes...........................................................................................................................................55
6.1.4 PLA............................................................................................................................................................................56
6.2 Configuration Procedure...............................................................................................................................................57
6.3 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the TDM Radio Chain Network)................................................................68
6.3.1 Networking Diagram.................................................................................................................................................68
6.3.2 Service Planning........................................................................................................................................................70
6.3.3 Configuration Process................................................................................................................................................73
6.4 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the TDM Radio Ring Network)..................................................................80
6.4.1 Networking Diagram.................................................................................................................................................80
6.4.2 Service Planning........................................................................................................................................................82
6.4.3 Configuration Process................................................................................................................................................85
6.5 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the Hybrid Radio Chain Network)..............................................................89
6.5.1 Networking Diagram.................................................................................................................................................89
6.5.2 Service Planning........................................................................................................................................................92
6.5.3 Configuration Process................................................................................................................................................96
6.6 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the Hybrid Radio Ring Network)..............................................................105
6.6.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................................105
6.6.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................................108
6.6.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................................111
6.7 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the Packet Network)..................................................................................117
6.7.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................................117
6.7.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................................119
6.7.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................................122

7 Configuring TDM Services.....................................................................................................127


7.1 Basic Concepts...........................................................................................................................................................128
7.1.1 Protection Modes for TDM Services.......................................................................................................................128
7.1.2 Timeslots for TDM Services on IF Boards.............................................................................................................130
7.1.3 Numbering Schemes for SDH Timeslots ...............................................................................................................131
7.1.4 TDM Timeslot Planning Schemes...........................................................................................................................132

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) Contents

7.2 Configuration Procedure on a Per-NE Basis..............................................................................................................135


7.3 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a TDM Radio Chain Network)..............................................................139
7.3.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................................139
7.3.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................................141
7.3.3 Configuration Process (on a Per-NE Basis)............................................................................................................143
7.4 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a TDM Radio Ring Network)................................................................146
7.4.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................................146
7.4.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................................148
7.4.3 Configuration Process (on a Per-NE Basis)............................................................................................................150
7.5 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a Hybrid Radio Chain Network)...........................................................154
7.5.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................................154
7.5.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................................156
7.5.3 Configuration Process (on a Per-NE Basis)............................................................................................................157
7.6 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a Hybrid Radio Ring Network).............................................................160
7.6.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................................160
7.6.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................................162
7.6.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................................163

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane..............................................167


8.1 Basic Concepts...........................................................................................................................................................169
8.1.1 What's the Packet Plane...........................................................................................................................................169
8.1.2 Ethernet Port Numbers............................................................................................................................................170
8.1.3 Auto-Negotiation.....................................................................................................................................................170
8.1.4 Flow Control Function.............................................................................................................................................172
8.1.5 Native Ethernet Service Types Based on the Packet Plane.....................................................................................173
8.1.5.1 Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-Line Service...................................................................................173
8.1.5.2 VLAN-based E-Line Services..............................................................................................................................175
8.1.5.3 QinQ-Based E-Line Services................................................................................................................................176
8.1.5.4 8021D Bridge-based E-LAN Services.................................................................................................................180
8.1.5.5 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services................................................................................................................180
8.1.5.6 802.1ad Bridge-based E-LAN Services................................................................................................................182
8.1.6 Typical Mobile Carrier Network Topologies for Ethernet Services.......................................................................183
8.1.6.1 Networking of VLAN-Based E-Line Services.....................................................................................................183
8.1.6.2 Networking of IEEE 802.1d Bridge-Based E-LAN Services...............................................................................184
8.1.6.3 Networking of IEEE 802.1q Bridge-Based E-LAN Services...............................................................................185
8.1.6.4 Comparison Between the Three Networking Modes...........................................................................................186
8.1.7 MAC Address Table Management..........................................................................................................................190
8.1.8 VLAN Forwarding Table for E-Line Services........................................................................................................190
8.1.9 Split Horizon Group................................................................................................................................................191
8.1.10 Protection for Native Ethernet Services................................................................................................................192
8.2 Configuration Procedure.............................................................................................................................................195
8.2.1 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-Line Services).....................195

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) Contents

8.2.2 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (VLAN-Based E-Line Services).................................................................202


8.2.3 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QinQ-Based E-Line Services)....................................................................210
8.2.4 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (IEEE 802.1d Bridge-based E-LAN Services)............................................217
8.2.5 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (IEEE 802.1q Bridge-based E-LAN Services)............................................222
8.2.6 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (IEEE 802.1ad Bridge-based E-LAN Services)..........................................227
8.2.7 Configuration Procedure (Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-Line Services).........................................232
8.2.8 Configuration Procedure (VLAN-Based E-Line Services).....................................................................................239
8.2.9 Configuration Procedure (QinQ-Based E-Line Services).......................................................................................247
8.2.10 Configuration Procedure (IEEE 802.1d Bridge-Based E-LAN Services).............................................................254
8.2.11 Configuration Procedure (IEEE 802.1q Bridge-Based E-LAN Services).............................................................262
8.2.12 Configuration Procedure (IEEE 802.1ad Bridge-Based E-LAN Services)...........................................................270
8.3 Configuration Example (Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-Line Services)..............................................278
8.3.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................................278
8.3.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................................279
8.3.2.1 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports).........................................................................................................................279
8.3.2.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)................................................................................................................280
8.3.2.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)...................................................................................................................281
8.3.2.4 Service Planning (QoS)........................................................................................................................................281
8.3.3 End-to-End Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................283
8.3.4 Per-NE Configuration Process.................................................................................................................................283
8.3.4.1 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports)................................................................................................................283
8.3.4.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................................284
8.3.4.3 Configuration Process (Service Information).......................................................................................................284
8.3.4.4 Configuration Process (QoS)................................................................................................................................285
8.3.4.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...................................................................287
8.4 Configuration Example (VLAN-Based E-Line Service)............................................................................................289
8.4.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................................289
8.4.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................................291
8.4.2.1 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports).........................................................................................................................292
8.4.2.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)................................................................................................................294
8.4.2.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)...................................................................................................................295
8.4.2.4 Service Planning (QoS)........................................................................................................................................297
8.4.3 End-to-End Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................299
8.4.3.1 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports)................................................................................................................299
8.4.3.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................................303
8.4.3.3 Configuration Process (Service Information).......................................................................................................303
8.4.3.4 Configuration Process (QoS)................................................................................................................................305
8.4.3.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...................................................................308
8.4.4 Per-NE Configuration Process.................................................................................................................................312
8.4.4.1 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports)................................................................................................................312
8.4.4.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................................316

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) Contents

8.4.4.3 Configuration Process (Service Information).......................................................................................................316


8.4.4.4 Configuration Process (QoS)................................................................................................................................318
8.4.4.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...................................................................322
8.5 Configuration Example (QinQ-Based E-Line Service)..............................................................................................326
8.5.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................................326
8.5.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................................329
8.5.2.1 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports).........................................................................................................................329
8.5.2.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)................................................................................................................333
8.5.2.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)...................................................................................................................334
8.5.2.4 Service Planning (QoS)........................................................................................................................................337
8.5.3 End-to-End Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................339
8.5.3.1 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports)................................................................................................................339
8.5.3.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................................344
8.5.3.3 Configuration Process (Service Information).......................................................................................................344
8.5.3.4 Configuration Process (QoS)................................................................................................................................346
8.5.3.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...................................................................350
8.5.4 Per-NE Configuration Process.................................................................................................................................354
8.5.4.1 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports)................................................................................................................354
8.5.4.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................................359
8.5.4.3 Configuration Process (Service Information).......................................................................................................359
8.5.4.4 Configuration Process (QoS)................................................................................................................................363
8.5.4.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...................................................................367
8.6 Configuration Example (802.1d-Bridge-Based E-LAN Service)...............................................................................371
8.6.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................................372
8.6.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................................374
8.6.2.1 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports).........................................................................................................................374
8.6.2.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)................................................................................................................378
8.6.2.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)...................................................................................................................379
8.6.2.4 Service Planning (QoS)........................................................................................................................................379
8.6.3 End-to-End Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................381
8.6.3.1 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................................381
8.6.3.2 Configuration Process (Service Information).......................................................................................................382
8.6.3.3 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports)................................................................................................................384
8.6.3.4 Configuration Process (QoS)................................................................................................................................386
8.6.3.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...................................................................390
8.6.4 Per-NE Configuration Process.................................................................................................................................392
8.6.4.1 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports)................................................................................................................392
8.6.4.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................................395
8.6.4.3 Configuration Process (Service Information).......................................................................................................396
8.6.4.4 Configuration Process (QoS)................................................................................................................................398
8.6.4.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...................................................................401

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) Contents

8.7 Configuration Example (802.1q-Bridge-Based E-LAN Service)...............................................................................404


8.7.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................................404
8.7.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................................406
8.7.2.1 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports).........................................................................................................................407
8.7.2.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)................................................................................................................411
8.7.2.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)...................................................................................................................411
8.7.2.4 Service Planning (QoS)........................................................................................................................................412
8.7.3 End-to-End Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................414
8.7.3.1 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................................414
8.7.3.2 Configuration Process (Service Information).......................................................................................................414
8.7.3.3 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports)................................................................................................................416
8.7.3.4 Configuration Process (QoS)................................................................................................................................419
8.7.3.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...................................................................423
8.7.4 Per-NE Configuration Process.................................................................................................................................426
8.7.4.1 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports)................................................................................................................426
8.7.4.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................................433
8.7.4.3 Configuration Process (Service Information).......................................................................................................433
8.7.4.4 Configuration Process (QoS)................................................................................................................................435
8.7.4.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...................................................................439
8.8 Configuration Example (802.1ad-Bridge-Based E-LAN Service).............................................................................443
8.8.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................................443
8.8.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................................446
8.8.2.1 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports).........................................................................................................................446
8.8.2.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)................................................................................................................450
8.8.2.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)...................................................................................................................451
8.8.2.4 Service Planning (QoS)........................................................................................................................................451
8.8.3 End-to-End Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................453
8.8.3.1 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................................453
8.8.3.2 Configuration Process (Service Information).......................................................................................................454
8.8.3.3 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports)................................................................................................................456
8.8.3.4 Configuration Process (QoS)................................................................................................................................458
8.8.3.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...................................................................461
8.8.4 Per-NE Configuration Process.................................................................................................................................465
8.8.4.1 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports)................................................................................................................465
8.8.4.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................................470
8.8.4.3 Configuration Process (Service Information).......................................................................................................470
8.8.4.4 Configuration Process (QoS)................................................................................................................................473
8.8.4.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...................................................................476
8.9 Configuration Example (Hybrid Configuration of E-Line Services and E-LAN Services).......................................479
8.9.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................................480
8.9.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................................482

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential x


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) Contents

8.9.2.1 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports).........................................................................................................................482


8.9.2.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)................................................................................................................486
8.9.2.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)...................................................................................................................486
8.9.2.4 Service Planning (QoS)........................................................................................................................................489
8.9.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................................491
8.9.3.1 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports)................................................................................................................491
8.9.3.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................................494
8.9.3.3 Configuration Process (Service Information).......................................................................................................494
8.9.3.4 Configuration Process (QoS)................................................................................................................................497
8.9.3.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...................................................................501

9 Configuring EoS/EoPDH-Based Ethernet Services.............................................................505


9.1 Basic Concepts...........................................................................................................................................................506
9.1.1 What's the EoS Plane...............................................................................................................................................506
9.1.2 What's the EoPDH Plane.........................................................................................................................................507
9.1.3 VCTRUNK..............................................................................................................................................................507
9.1.4 Hub/Spoke...............................................................................................................................................................508
9.1.5 EoS/EoPDH-Based Ethernet Services.....................................................................................................................508
9.1.5.1 Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted EPL Services.....................................................................................508
9.1.5.2 VLAN-based EVPL Services...............................................................................................................................509
9.1.5.3 QinQ-based EVPL Services.................................................................................................................................511
9.1.5.4 802.1D Bridge-based EPLAN Services................................................................................................................514
9.1.5.5 802.1Q Bridge-based EVPLAN Services.............................................................................................................515
9.1.5.6 802.1ad Bridge-based EVPLAN Services............................................................................................................517
9.2 Configuration Procedure.............................................................................................................................................518
9.2.1 Configuration Procedure (Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted EPL Services).............................................518
9.2.2 Configuration Procedure (VLAN-Based EVPL Services)......................................................................................525
9.2.3 Configuration Procedure (QinQ-Based EVPL Services)........................................................................................531
9.2.4 Configuration Procedure (IEEE 802.1d Bridge-Based EPLAN Services)..............................................................537
9.2.5 Configuration Procedure (IEEE 802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services)...........................................................543
9.2.6 Configuration Procedure (IEEE 802.1ad Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services).........................................................550
9.3 Configuration Example (Ethernet Services Based on TDM Radio)...........................................................................557
9.3.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................................558
9.3.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................................561
9.3.2.1 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports).........................................................................................................................561
9.3.2.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)................................................................................................................564
9.3.2.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)...................................................................................................................564
9.3.2.4 Service Planning (Ethernet Service Cross-Connections).....................................................................................566
9.3.2.5 Service Planning (QoS)........................................................................................................................................569
9.3.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................................569
9.3.3.1 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports)................................................................................................................569
9.3.3.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................................572

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) Contents

9.3.3.3 Configuration Process (Ethernet Services)...........................................................................................................573


9.3.3.4 Configuration Process (Cross-Connections) .......................................................................................................574
9.3.3.5 Configuration Process (QoS)................................................................................................................................576
9.3.3.6 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...................................................................576
9.4 Configuration Example (Ethernet Services Traversing a TDM Network).................................................................579
9.4.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................................579
9.4.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................................581
9.4.2.1 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports on the Packet Plane)........................................................................................582
9.4.2.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane)...................................................................................582
9.4.2.3 Service Planning (QoS on the Packet Plane)........................................................................................................583
9.4.2.4 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports on the EFP8 Board).........................................................................................585
9.4.2.5 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection for the EFP8 Board)................................................................................587
9.4.2.6 Service Planning (Ethernet Services on the EFP8 Board)....................................................................................588
9.4.2.7 Service Planning (Cross-Connections).................................................................................................................589
9.4.2.8 Service Planning (QoS of the EFP8 Board).........................................................................................................590
9.4.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................................592
9.4.3.1 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports on the Packet Plane) ...............................................................................592
9.4.3.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane) .........................................................................593
9.4.3.3 Configuration Process (QoS on the Packet Plane)...............................................................................................594
9.4.3.4 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports on the EFP8 Board).................................................................................596
9.4.3.5 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection on the EFP8 Board)........................................................................598
9.4.3.6 Configuration Process (Ethernet Services on the EFP8 Board)...........................................................................600
9.4.3.7 Configuration Process (Cross-Connections) .......................................................................................................601
9.4.3.8 Configuration Process (QoS on the EFP8 Board)................................................................................................602
9.4.3.9 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...................................................................604

10 Configuring MPLS Tunnels..................................................................................................607


10.1 Basic Concept...........................................................................................................................................................608
10.1.1 MPLS Network Architecture.................................................................................................................................608
10.1.2 LSP........................................................................................................................................................................608
10.1.3 Protection for MPLS Tunnels................................................................................................................................611
10.2 Configuration Procedure...........................................................................................................................................612
10.2.1 End-to-End Configuration Procedure....................................................................................................................612
10.2.2 Configuration Procedure (on a Per-NE Basis)......................................................................................................622
10.3 Configuration Example (MPLS Tunnels with MPLS APS Protection)...................................................................632
10.3.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................................632
10.3.2 Service Planning....................................................................................................................................................633
10.3.2.1 Service Planning (MPLS Ports)..........................................................................................................................633
10.3.2.2 Service Planning (MPLS Tunnel).......................................................................................................................636
10.3.2.3 Service Planning (MPLS Tunnel APS)..............................................................................................................637
10.3.2.4 Service Planning (QoS)......................................................................................................................................641
10.3.3 End-to-End Configuration Procedure....................................................................................................................643

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) Contents

10.3.3.1 Configuration Process (MPLS Ports).................................................................................................................643


10.3.3.2 Configuration Process (MPLS Tunnels).............................................................................................................645
10.3.3.3 Configuration Process (QoS)..............................................................................................................................648
10.3.3.4 Configuration Process (Verifying Configured MPLS Tunnels).........................................................................650
10.3.4 Configuration Process (on a Per-NE Basis)..........................................................................................................651
10.3.4.1 Configuration Process (MPLS Ports).................................................................................................................651
10.3.4.2 Configuration Process (MPLS Tunnel)..............................................................................................................654
10.3.4.3 Configuration Process (MPLS APS)..................................................................................................................661
10.3.4.4 Configuration Process (QoS)..............................................................................................................................665
10.3.4.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Configured MPLS Tunnels).........................................................................667
10.4 Configuration Example (MPLS Tunnels with No Protection).................................................................................668
10.4.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................................668
10.4.2 Service Planning....................................................................................................................................................669
10.4.2.1 Service Planning (MPLS Ports)..........................................................................................................................669
10.4.2.2 Service Planning (MPLS Tunnels).....................................................................................................................670
10.4.2.3 Service Planning (QoS)......................................................................................................................................672
10.4.3 End-to-End Configuration Process........................................................................................................................674
10.4.3.1 Configuration Process (MPLS Ports).................................................................................................................674
10.4.3.2 Configuration Process (MPLS Tunnels).............................................................................................................676
10.4.3.3 Configuration Process (QoS)..............................................................................................................................677
10.4.3.4 Configuration Process (Verifying Configured MPLS Tunnels).........................................................................679
10.4.4 Configuration Process (on a Per-NE Basis)..........................................................................................................680
10.4.4.1 Configuration Process (MPLS Ports).................................................................................................................681
10.4.4.2 Configuration Process (MPLS Tunnels).............................................................................................................682
10.4.4.3 Configuration Process (QoS)..............................................................................................................................685
10.4.4.4 Configuration Process (Verifying Configured MPLS Tunnels).........................................................................687
10.5 Configuration Example (MPLS Tunnels Traversing L2 Networks)........................................................................688
10.5.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................................688
10.5.2 Service Planning....................................................................................................................................................690
10.5.2.1 Service Planning (MPLS Ports)..........................................................................................................................690
10.5.2.2 Service Planning (VLAN Sub-Interfaces)..........................................................................................................691
10.5.2.3 Service Planning (MPLS Tunnels).....................................................................................................................693
10.5.2.4 Service Planning (QoS)......................................................................................................................................694
10.5.3 Configuration Process (on a Per-NE Basis)..........................................................................................................696
10.5.3.1 Configuration Process (MPLS Ports).................................................................................................................696
10.5.3.2 Configuration Process (VLAN Sub-Interfaces).................................................................................................699
10.5.3.3 Configuration Process (MPLS Tunnels).............................................................................................................700
10.5.3.4 Configuration Process (QoS)..............................................................................................................................705
10.5.3.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Configured MPLS Tunnels).........................................................................707

11 Configuring PWE3 Services..................................................................................................710


11.1 Basic Concept...........................................................................................................................................................712

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) Contents

11.1.1 Types of PWE3 Services.......................................................................................................................................712


11.1.1.1 CES Services......................................................................................................................................................712
11.1.1.2 ATM/IMA Services............................................................................................................................................714
11.1.1.3 PW-Carried E-Line Services..............................................................................................................................715
11.1.1.4 PW-Carried E-AGGR Services..........................................................................................................................718
11.1.2 MS-PW..................................................................................................................................................................721
11.2 Configuration Procedure...........................................................................................................................................723
11.2.1 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (CES Services)..........................................................................................723
11.2.2 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (CES Services).................................................................................................726
11.2.3 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (ATM Services).........................................................................................729
11.2.4 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (ATM Services)................................................................................................734
11.2.5 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (E-Line Services Carried by PWs)............................................................741
11.2.6 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (E-Line Services Carried by PWs)...................................................................748
11.2.7 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (PW-Carried E-AGGR Services).....................................................................755
11.3 Configuration Example (Common CES Services)...................................................................................................763
11.3.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................................763
11.3.2 Service Planning....................................................................................................................................................765
11.3.2.1 Service Planning (UNI Ports).............................................................................................................................765
11.3.2.2 Service Planning (Service Information).............................................................................................................765
11.3.3 End-to-End Configuration Process........................................................................................................................767
11.3.3.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports).....................................................................................................................767
11.3.3.2 Configuration Process (Service Information).....................................................................................................768
11.3.3.3 Configuration Process (Verifying CES Service Configurations).......................................................................770
11.3.4 Per-NE Configuration Process...............................................................................................................................770
11.3.4.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports).....................................................................................................................770
11.3.4.2 Configuration Process (Service Information).....................................................................................................771
11.3.4.3 Configuration Process (Verifying CES Service Configurations).......................................................................773
11.4 Configuration Example (Fractional CES Services)..................................................................................................774
11.4.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................................774
11.4.2 Service Planning....................................................................................................................................................775
11.4.2.1 Service Planning (UNI Ports).............................................................................................................................775
11.4.2.2 Service Planning (Service Information).............................................................................................................776
11.4.3 End-to-End Configuration Process........................................................................................................................778
11.4.3.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports).....................................................................................................................778
11.4.3.2 Configuration Process (Service Information).....................................................................................................779
11.4.3.3 Configuration Process (Verifying CES Service Configurations).......................................................................780
11.4.4 Per-NE Configuration Process...............................................................................................................................780
11.4.4.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports).....................................................................................................................780
11.4.4.2 Configuration Process (Service Information).....................................................................................................781
11.4.4.3 Configuration Process (Verifying CES Service Configurations).......................................................................784
11.5 Configuration Example (MS-PW-based CES Services)..........................................................................................784

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiv


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) Contents

11.5.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................................784


11.5.2 Service Planning....................................................................................................................................................785
11.5.2.1 Service Planning (UNI Ports).............................................................................................................................786
11.5.2.2 Service Planning (Service Information).............................................................................................................786
11.5.3 End-to-End Configuration Process........................................................................................................................788
11.5.3.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports).....................................................................................................................788
11.5.3.2 Configuration Process (Service Information).....................................................................................................789
11.5.3.3 Configuration Process (Verifying CES Service Configurations).......................................................................790
11.5.4 Per-NE Configuration Process...............................................................................................................................790
11.5.4.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports).....................................................................................................................791
11.5.4.2 Configuration Process (Service Information).....................................................................................................792
11.5.4.3 Configuration Process (Verifying CES Service Configurations).......................................................................795
11.6 Configuration Example (Common ATM Services)..................................................................................................795
11.6.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................................796
11.6.2 ServicePlanning.....................................................................................................................................................797
11.6.2.1 Service Planning (UNI Ports).............................................................................................................................797
11.6.2.2 Service Planning (ATM/IMA Information).......................................................................................................798
11.6.2.3 Service Planning (QoS)......................................................................................................................................800
11.6.2.4 Service Planning (Service Information).............................................................................................................802
11.6.3 End-to-End Configuration Process........................................................................................................................805
11.6.3.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports).....................................................................................................................805
11.6.3.2 Configuration Process (IMA Information).........................................................................................................806
11.6.3.3 Configuration Process (QoS Information)..........................................................................................................808
11.6.3.4 Configuration Process (Service Information).....................................................................................................809
11.6.3.5 Configuration Process (Verifying ATM Service Configurations).....................................................................811
11.6.4 Per-NE Configuration Process...............................................................................................................................811
11.6.4.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports).....................................................................................................................811
11.6.4.2 Configuration Process (IMA Information).........................................................................................................812
11.6.4.3 Configuration Process (QoS)..............................................................................................................................814
11.6.4.4 Configuration Process (Service Information).....................................................................................................816
11.6.4.5 Configuration Process (Verifying ATM Service Configurations).....................................................................821
11.7 Configuration Example (Fractional ATM Services)................................................................................................821
11.7.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................................821
11.7.2 ServicePlanning.....................................................................................................................................................823
11.7.2.1 Service Planning (UNI Ports).............................................................................................................................823
11.7.2.2 Service Planning (ATM/IMA Information).......................................................................................................824
11.7.2.3 Service Planning (QoS)......................................................................................................................................825
11.7.2.4 Service Planning (Service Information).............................................................................................................827
11.7.3 End-to-End Configuration Process........................................................................................................................829
11.7.3.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports).....................................................................................................................829
11.7.3.2 Configuration Process (IMA Information).........................................................................................................831

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xv


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) Contents

11.7.3.3 Configuration Process (QoS Information)..........................................................................................................833


11.7.3.4 Configuration Process (Service Information).....................................................................................................834
11.7.3.5 Configuration Process (Verifying ATM Service Configurations).....................................................................836
11.7.4 Per-NE Configuration Process...............................................................................................................................836
11.7.4.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports).....................................................................................................................836
11.7.4.2 Configuration Process (IMA Information).........................................................................................................838
11.7.4.3 Configuration Process (QoS)..............................................................................................................................840
11.7.4.4 Configuration Process (Service Information).....................................................................................................841
11.7.4.5 Configuration Process (Verifying ATM Service Configurations).....................................................................847
11.8 Configuration Example (ATM Services on MS-PWs).............................................................................................847
11.8.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................................847
11.8.2 ServicePlanning.....................................................................................................................................................848
11.8.2.1 Service Planning (UNI Ports).............................................................................................................................848
11.8.2.2 Service Planning (ATM/IMA Information).......................................................................................................849
11.8.2.3 Service Planning (QoS)......................................................................................................................................850
11.8.2.4 Service Planning (Service Information).............................................................................................................852
11.8.3 End-to-End Configuration Process........................................................................................................................858
11.8.3.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports).....................................................................................................................858
11.8.3.2 Configuration Process (IMA Information).........................................................................................................859
11.8.3.3 Configuration Process (QoS Information)..........................................................................................................861
11.8.3.4 Configuration Process (Service Information).....................................................................................................862
11.8.3.5 Configuration Process (Verifying ATM Service Configurations).....................................................................864
11.8.4 Per-NE Configuration Process...............................................................................................................................864
11.8.4.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports).....................................................................................................................864
11.8.4.2 Configuration Process (IMA Information).........................................................................................................865
11.8.4.3 Configuration Process (QoS)..............................................................................................................................867
11.8.4.4 Configuration Process (Service Information).....................................................................................................868
11.8.4.5 Configuration Process (Verifying ATM Service Configurations).....................................................................878
11.9 Configuration Example (Transparently Transmitted ATM Services)......................................................................878
11.9.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................................878
11.9.2 ServicePlanning.....................................................................................................................................................879
11.9.2.1 Service Planning (UNI Ports).............................................................................................................................879
11.9.2.2 Service Planning (ATM/IMA Information).......................................................................................................880
11.9.2.3 Service Planning (QoS)......................................................................................................................................881
11.9.2.4 Service Planning (Service Information).............................................................................................................882
11.9.3 Per-NE Configuration Process...............................................................................................................................884
11.9.3.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports).....................................................................................................................884
11.9.3.2 Configuration Process (IMA Information).........................................................................................................885
11.9.3.3 Configuration Process (QoS)..............................................................................................................................887
11.9.3.4 Configuration Process (Service Information).....................................................................................................888
11.9.3.5 Configuration Process (Verifying ATM Service Configurations).....................................................................892

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvi


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) Contents

11.10 Configuration Example (E-Line Services Carried on PWs, a Simple Example)...................................................892


11.10.1 Networking Diagram...........................................................................................................................................892
11.10.2 Service Planning..................................................................................................................................................894
11.10.2.1 Service Planning (UNI Ports)...........................................................................................................................894
11.10.2.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)............................................................................................................895
11.10.2.3 Service Planning (Service Information)...........................................................................................................895
11.10.2.4 Service Planning (QoS)....................................................................................................................................897
11.10.3 End-to-End Configuration Process......................................................................................................................898
11.10.3.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports)...................................................................................................................898
11.10.3.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)....................................................................................................900
11.10.3.3 Configuration Process (Service Information)...................................................................................................900
11.10.3.4 Configuration Process (QoS)............................................................................................................................902
11.10.3.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...............................................................903
11.10.4 Per-NE Configuration Process.............................................................................................................................906
11.10.4.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports)...................................................................................................................906
11.10.4.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)....................................................................................................907
11.10.4.3 Configuration Process (Service Information)...................................................................................................908
11.10.4.4 Configuration Process (QoS)............................................................................................................................910
11.10.4.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...............................................................912
11.11 Configuration Example (E-Line Services Carried on PWs and Transmitting the Ethernet Services Aggregated from
the Hybrid Microwave Network).....................................................................................................................................914
11.11.1 Networking Diagram...........................................................................................................................................914
11.11.2 Service Planning..................................................................................................................................................916
11.11.2.1 Service Planning (UNI Ports)...........................................................................................................................916
11.11.2.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)............................................................................................................917
11.11.2.3 Service Planning (Service Information)...........................................................................................................918
11.11.2.4 Service Planning (QoS)....................................................................................................................................919
11.11.3 End-to-End Configuration Process......................................................................................................................921
11.11.3.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports)...................................................................................................................921
11.11.3.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)....................................................................................................922
11.11.3.3 Configuration Process (Service Information)...................................................................................................923
11.11.3.4 Configuration Process (QoS)............................................................................................................................925
11.11.3.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...............................................................926
11.11.4 Per-NE Configuration Process.............................................................................................................................929
11.11.4.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports)...................................................................................................................929
11.11.4.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)....................................................................................................931
11.11.4.3 Configuration Process (Service Information)...................................................................................................931
11.11.4.4 Configuration Process (QoS)............................................................................................................................935
11.11.4.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...............................................................937
11.12 Configuration Example (E-Line Services Carried on MS-PWs)............................................................................939
11.12.1 Networking Diagram...........................................................................................................................................939
11.12.2 Service Planning..................................................................................................................................................941

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) Contents

11.12.2.1 Service Planning (UNI Ports)...........................................................................................................................941


11.12.2.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)............................................................................................................942
11.12.2.3 Service Planning (Service Information)...........................................................................................................942
11.12.2.4 Service Planning (QoS)....................................................................................................................................945
11.12.3 End-to-End Configuration Process......................................................................................................................946
11.12.3.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports)...................................................................................................................946
11.12.3.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)....................................................................................................947
11.12.3.3 Configuration Process (Service Information)...................................................................................................948
11.12.3.4 Configuration Process (QoS)............................................................................................................................949
11.12.3.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...............................................................951
11.12.4 Per-NE Configuration Process.............................................................................................................................953
11.12.4.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports)...................................................................................................................953
11.12.4.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)....................................................................................................955
11.12.4.3 Configuration Process (Service Information)...................................................................................................955
11.12.4.4 Configuration Process (QoS)............................................................................................................................958
11.12.4.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...............................................................960
11.13 Configuration Example (PW-Carried E-AGGR Services).....................................................................................962
11.13.1 Networking Diagram...........................................................................................................................................962
11.13.2 Service Planning..................................................................................................................................................964
11.13.2.1 Service Planning (UNI Ports)...........................................................................................................................964
11.13.2.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)............................................................................................................966
11.13.2.3 Service Planning (Service Information)...........................................................................................................966
11.13.2.4 Service Planning (QoS)....................................................................................................................................969
11.13.3 Per-NE Configuration Process.............................................................................................................................970
11.13.3.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports)...................................................................................................................971
11.13.3.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)....................................................................................................972
11.13.3.3 Configuration Process (Service Information)...................................................................................................973
11.13.3.4 Configuration Process (QoS Information)........................................................................................................977
11.13.3.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...............................................................979

12 Configuring the Clock............................................................................................................982


12.1 Basic Concepts.........................................................................................................................................................983
12.1.1 Clock Source..........................................................................................................................................................983
12.1.2 Clock Protection Modes........................................................................................................................................983
12.1.3 Clock Synchronization Policy...............................................................................................................................987
12.2 Configuration Procedure...........................................................................................................................................995
12.3 Configuration Example (Clock for a TDM Radio Chain Network).........................................................................998
12.3.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................................998
12.3.2 Service Planning..................................................................................................................................................1000
12.3.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................................1000
12.4 Configuration Example (Clock for a TDM Radio Ring Network).........................................................................1001
12.4.1 Networking Diagram...........................................................................................................................................1001

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xviii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) Contents

12.4.2 Service Planning..................................................................................................................................................1003


12.4.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................................1004
12.5 Configuration Example (Clock for a Hybrid Radio Chain Network).....................................................................1005
12.5.1 Networking Diagram...........................................................................................................................................1005
12.5.2 Service Planning..................................................................................................................................................1007
12.5.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................................1008
12.6 Configuration Example (Clock for a Hybrid Radio Ring Network)......................................................................1009
12.6.1 Network Diagram ...............................................................................................................................................1009
12.6.2 Service Planning..................................................................................................................................................1010
12.6.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................................1012
12.7 Configuration Example (Clocks for a PSN)...........................................................................................................1013
12.7.1 Networking Diagram...........................................................................................................................................1013
12.7.2 Service Planning..................................................................................................................................................1015
12.7.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................................1016
12.8 Configuration Example (Clocks Across a Third-party TDM Network).................................................................1017
12.8.1 Networking Diagram...........................................................................................................................................1017
12.8.2 Service Planning..................................................................................................................................................1019
12.8.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................................1020

13 Configuring Auxiliary Ports and Functions.....................................................................1021


13.1 Auxiliary Ports and Functions................................................................................................................................1023
13.2 Environment Monitoring Functions.......................................................................................................................1025
13.3 Configuration Procedure (Monitoring the Outdoor Cabinet).................................................................................1027
13.4 Configuration Example (Orderwire)......................................................................................................................1030
13.4.1 Networking Diagram...........................................................................................................................................1030
13.4.2 Service Planning..................................................................................................................................................1032
13.4.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................................1033
13.5 Configuration Example (Synchronous Data Services)...........................................................................................1034
13.5.1 Networking Diagram...........................................................................................................................................1034
13.5.2 Service Planning..................................................................................................................................................1036
13.5.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................................1036
13.6 Configuration Example (Asynchronous Data Services).........................................................................................1037
13.6.1 Networking Diagram...........................................................................................................................................1037
13.6.2 Service Planning..................................................................................................................................................1039
13.6.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................................1039
13.7 Configuration Example (Wayside E1 Services).....................................................................................................1040
13.7.1 Networking Diagram...........................................................................................................................................1040
13.7.2 Service Planning..................................................................................................................................................1040
13.7.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................................1041
13.8 Configuration Example (External Alarms).............................................................................................................1041
13.8.1 Networking Diagram...........................................................................................................................................1041
13.8.2 Service Planning..................................................................................................................................................1042

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xix


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) Contents

13.8.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................................1043


13.9 Configuration Example (Monitoring the Outdoor Cabinet)...................................................................................1044
13.9.1 Network Diagram................................................................................................................................................1044
13.9.2 Service Planning..................................................................................................................................................1045
13.9.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................................1045

14 Adding and Modifying Configuration Data....................................................................1047


14.1 Common Task Collection (Network Topology).....................................................................................................1048
14.2 Common Task Collection (Radio Links)................................................................................................................1049
14.3 Common Task Collection (TDM Services)............................................................................................................1054
14.4 Common Task Collection (Packet-Plane Ethernet Services).................................................................................1055
14.5 Task Collection (EoS/EoPDH-Plane Ethernet Services)........................................................................................1058

A Task Collection.......................................................................................................................1060
A.1 U2000 Quick Start...................................................................................................................................................1062
A.1.1 Logging in to a U2000 Client...............................................................................................................................1062
A.1.2 Shutting Down a U2000 Client.............................................................................................................................1062
A.1.3 Using Online Help................................................................................................................................................1063
A.1.4 Navigating to Common Views.............................................................................................................................1063
A.1.4.1 Navigating to the Main Topology......................................................................................................................1063
A.1.4.2 Navigating to the NE Explorer..........................................................................................................................1064
A.1.4.3 Navigating to the NE Panel...............................................................................................................................1066
A.2 Network Management.............................................................................................................................................1067
A.2.1 Managing NEs......................................................................................................................................................1067
A.2.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method.......................................................................................................1067
A.2.1.2 Creating NEs by Using the Manual Method......................................................................................................1069
A.2.1.3 Configuring the Logical Board..........................................................................................................................1071
A.2.1.4 Configuring an SFP Port....................................................................................................................................1072
A.2.1.5 Changing the NE ID..........................................................................................................................................1073
A.2.1.6 Changing the NE Name.....................................................................................................................................1074
A.2.1.7 Synchronizing the NE Time..............................................................................................................................1075
A.2.1.8 Localizing the NE Time.....................................................................................................................................1078
A.2.1.9 Configuring Standard NTP Keys.......................................................................................................................1078
A.2.2 Configuring the NE Data......................................................................................................................................1079
A.2.2.1 Uploading the NE Data......................................................................................................................................1080
A.2.2.2 Synchronizing NE Data.....................................................................................................................................1080
A.2.3 Configuring the Performance Monitoring Status of NEs.....................................................................................1081
A.2.4 Suppressing Alarms for Monitored Objects.........................................................................................................1082
A.2.5 Connecting Fibers or Cables.................................................................................................................................1083
A.2.5.1 Creating Optical Fibers by Using the Search Method.......................................................................................1083
A.2.5.2 Creating Fibers Manually..................................................................................................................................1084
A.2.5.3 Creating an Extended ECC................................................................................................................................1085
A.2.5.4 Creating a Back-to-Back Radio Connection......................................................................................................1085

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xx


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) Contents

A.2.6 Managing Subnets................................................................................................................................................1086


A.2.6.1 Creating a Subnet...............................................................................................................................................1086
A.2.6.2 Copying Topology Objects................................................................................................................................1088
A.2.6.3 Moving Topology Objects.................................................................................................................................1088
A.2.7 Managing Communication...................................................................................................................................1088
A.2.7.1 Setting NE Communication Parameters............................................................................................................1089
A.2.7.2 Configuring DCCs.............................................................................................................................................1090
A.2.7.3 Configuring DCC Transparent Transmission....................................................................................................1091
A.2.7.4 Configuring the VLAN ID and Bandwidth Used by an Inband DCN...............................................................1092
A.2.7.5 Configuring the Priority of Inband DCN Packets..............................................................................................1093
A.2.7.6 Setting Parameters of Inband DCN...................................................................................................................1093
A.2.7.7 Configuring Access Control..............................................................................................................................1094
A.2.7.8 Configuring Extended ECC Communication....................................................................................................1095
A.2.7.9 Creating Static IP Routes...................................................................................................................................1097
A.2.7.10 Setting OSPF Protocol Parameters..................................................................................................................1098
A.2.7.11 Creating an OSPF Area...................................................................................................................................1099
A.2.7.12 Configuring the Network Information of an ABR..........................................................................................1100
A.2.7.13 Creating a Manual Route Aggregation Group.................................................................................................1101
A.2.7.14 Configuring Interface IP Addresses of an ABR..............................................................................................1102
A.2.7.15 Configuring the OSPF Authentication Type...................................................................................................1103
A.2.7.16 Enabling the Proxy ARP..................................................................................................................................1104
A.2.7.17 Configuring the CLNS Role............................................................................................................................1105
A.2.7.18 Configuring the OSI Tunnel............................................................................................................................1105
A.2.7.19 Configuring OSI Port Parameters....................................................................................................................1106
A.2.7.20 Enabling/Disabling the RSTP Protocol When the L2 DCN Solution Is Used................................................1107
A.2.7.21 Querying ECC Routes.....................................................................................................................................1108
A.2.7.22 Querying IP Routes..........................................................................................................................................1108
A.2.7.23 Querying OSI Routes.......................................................................................................................................1109
A.2.7.24 Verifying Connectivity of an ECC Network...................................................................................................1109
A.2.7.25 Verifying Connectivity of an IP DCN Network..............................................................................................1110
A.2.7.26 Configuring the Active and Standby Gateway NEs........................................................................................1110
A.2.8 Configuring the Network Management Port and LCT Access to an NE..............................................................1111
A.2.8.1 Configuring the Ethernet Network Management Port on an NE.......................................................................1111
A.2.8.2 Configuring the Network Management Serial Port on an NE...........................................................................1112
A.2.8.3 Configuring LCT Access to NEs.......................................................................................................................1113
A.2.9 Configuring an NE User.......................................................................................................................................1114
A.2.9.1 Creating an NE User..........................................................................................................................................1114
A.2.9.2 Changing the Password of an NE User..............................................................................................................1115
A.2.9.3 Setting Warning Screen Parameters..................................................................................................................1116
A.2.9.4 Switching NE Users...........................................................................................................................................1117
A.2.10 Configuring SSL Protocol Communication........................................................................................................1118

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxi


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) Contents

A.2.10.1 Configuring SSL Protocol Communication Between a U2000 Server and its Clients....................................1118
A.2.10.2 Configuring the Connection Mode Between a U2000 Client and Its Gateway NE........................................1119
A.2.11 Configuring RADIUS Authentication................................................................................................................1121
A.2.11.1 Enabling/Disabling the RADIUS Function.....................................................................................................1121
A.2.11.2 Creating a RADIUS Server or a RADIUS Proxy Server................................................................................1122
A.2.11.3 Configuring RADIUS Server Parameters........................................................................................................1123
A.3 Managing Radio Links............................................................................................................................................1125
A.3.1 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group...................................................................................................................1125
A.3.2 Creating an XPIC Workgroup..............................................................................................................................1127
A.3.3 Setting the AM Attributes of the XPIC Workgroup.............................................................................................1128
A.3.4 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link........................................................................................1130
A.3.5 Configuring a Single-Hop Radio Link.................................................................................................................1132
A.3.6 Creating an N+1 Protection Group.......................................................................................................................1135
A.3.7 Querying the IF 1+1 Protection Status.................................................................................................................1136
A.3.8 Querying the IF N+1 Protection Status................................................................................................................1137
A.3.9 IF 1+1 Protection Switching.................................................................................................................................1137
A.3.10 IF N+1 Protection Switching..............................................................................................................................1138
A.3.11 Starting/Stopping the N+1 Protection Protocol..................................................................................................1138
A.3.12 Creating a PLA Group........................................................................................................................................1139
A.3.13 Querying the Status of a PLA Group..................................................................................................................1141
A.4 Managing the MSP..................................................................................................................................................1142
A.4.1 Configuring Linear MSP......................................................................................................................................1142
A.4.2 Querying the Status of the Linear MSP................................................................................................................1143
A.4.3 Performing Linear MSP Switching......................................................................................................................1144
A.4.4 Starting/Stopping the Linear MSP Protocol.........................................................................................................1145
A.5 Managing TDM Services.........................................................................................................................................1146
A.5.1 Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services.................................................................................1146
A.5.2 Creating Cross-Connections of SNCP Services...................................................................................................1147
A.5.3 Modifying the Priorities of E1 Services...............................................................................................................1148
A.5.4 Inserting E1_AIS upon a TU_AIS Condition.......................................................................................................1149
A.5.5 Configuring the Automatic Switching of SNCP Services....................................................................................1150
A.5.6 Deleting Cross-Connections.................................................................................................................................1151
A.5.7 Converting a Normal Service into an SNCP Service...........................................................................................1152
A.5.8 Converting an SNCP Service to a Normal Service..............................................................................................1153
A.5.9 Querying TDM Services.......................................................................................................................................1154
A.5.10 Switching SNCP Services...................................................................................................................................1154
A.5.11 Querying the Protection Status of SNCP Services.............................................................................................1155
A.6 Managing Ports........................................................................................................................................................1155
A.6.1 Setting the Parameters of SDH Ports....................................................................................................................1156
A.6.2 Setting the Parameters of PDH Ports....................................................................................................................1157
A.6.3 Configuring Overhead Bytes................................................................................................................................1157

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) Contents

A.6.3.1 Configuring RSOHs...........................................................................................................................................1157


A.6.3.2 Configuring VC-4 POHs...................................................................................................................................1159
A.6.3.3 Configuring VC-12 POHs.................................................................................................................................1160
A.6.4 Setting Smart E1 Port Parameters.........................................................................................................................1161
A.6.4.1 Setting Basic Attributes of Smart E1 Ports........................................................................................................1161
A.6.4.2 Setting Advanced Attributes of Smart E1 Ports................................................................................................1162
A.6.5 Setting Serial Port Parameters..............................................................................................................................1163
A.6.5.1 Creating Serial Ports..........................................................................................................................................1163
A.6.5.2 Setting Basic Attributes of Serial Ports.............................................................................................................1164
A.6.6 Setting Ethernet Port Parameters..........................................................................................................................1165
A.6.6.1 Setting the Basic Attributes of Ethernet Ports...................................................................................................1165
A.6.6.2 Configuring the Traffic Control of Ethernet Ports............................................................................................1166
A.6.6.3 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Ports................................................................................................1167
A.6.6.4 Setting Layer 3 Attributes of Ethernet Ports......................................................................................................1168
A.6.6.5 Setting the Advanced Attributes of Ethernet Ports............................................................................................1169
A.6.7 Setting IF_ETH Port Parameters..........................................................................................................................1170
A.6.7.1 Setting the Basic Attributes of IF_ETH Ports...................................................................................................1170
A.6.7.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of IF_ETH Ports................................................................................................1171
A.6.7.3 Setting Layer 3 Attributes of IF_ETH Ports......................................................................................................1172
A.6.7.4 Setting the Advanced Attributes of IF_ETH Ports............................................................................................1173
A.6.8 Setting IF Port Parameters....................................................................................................................................1173
A.6.8.1 Setting IF Attributes..........................................................................................................................................1173
A.6.8.2 Configuring ATPC Attributes............................................................................................................................1175
A.6.8.3 Setting Advanced AM Attributes......................................................................................................................1176
A.6.8.4 Querying the AM Status....................................................................................................................................1177
A.6.8.5 Querying ATPC Adjustment Records...............................................................................................................1178
A.6.8.6 Modifying the Hybrid/AM Attributes...............................................................................................................1178
A.6.9 Setting ODU Port Parameters...............................................................................................................................1181
A.6.9.1 Setting ODU Transmit Frequency Attributes....................................................................................................1181
A.6.9.2 Querying ODU Information..............................................................................................................................1182
A.6.9.3 Setting ODU Power Attributes..........................................................................................................................1182
A.6.9.4 Setting ODU Advanced Attributes....................................................................................................................1183
A.6.9.5 Setting the ODU Transmitter State....................................................................................................................1184
A.6.9.6 Querying the Historical Transmit Power and Receive Power...........................................................................1185
A.6.9.7 Querying the SNR Values of a Radio Link.......................................................................................................1185
A.6.10 Creating VLAN Sub-Interfaces..........................................................................................................................1186
A.7 Configuring Ethernet Services and Features on the Packet Plane...........................................................................1187
A.7.1 Managing ERPS....................................................................................................................................................1187
A.7.1.1 Creating Ethernet Ring Protection Instances.....................................................................................................1187
A.7.1.2 Setting the Parameters of Ethernet Ring Protocol.............................................................................................1188
A.7.1.3 Querying the Status of the Ethernet Ring Protocol...........................................................................................1189

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxiii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) Contents

A.7.2 Managing the LAG...............................................................................................................................................1190


A.7.2.1 Creating a LAG..................................................................................................................................................1190
A.7.2.2 Setting LAG Parameters....................................................................................................................................1192
A.7.2.3 Querying the Protocol Information of the LAG................................................................................................1193
A.7.3 Configuring Ethernet Services..............................................................................................................................1194
A.7.3.1 Configuring the QinQ Link...............................................................................................................................1194
A.7.3.2 Configuring UNI-UNI E-Line Services.............................................................................................................1194
A.7.3.3 Configuring NNI-NNI E-Line Services (Carried by QinQ Links)....................................................................1195
A.7.3.4 Configuring UNI-NNI E-Line Services (Carried by QinQ Links)....................................................................1196
A.7.3.5 Configuring UNI-NNI E-Line Services (Carried by PWs)...............................................................................1198
A.7.3.6 Creating E-AGGR Services...............................................................................................................................1200
A.7.3.7 Creating a VLAN Forwarding Table for an E-Line Service.............................................................................1203
A.7.3.8 Configuring TPID for a Request VLAN...........................................................................................................1204
A.7.3.9 Configuring IEEE 802.1d Bridge-Based E-LAN Services................................................................................1205
A.7.3.10 Configuring IEEE 802.1q Bridge-Based E-LAN Services..............................................................................1206
A.7.3.11 Configuring IEEE 802.1ad Bridge-Based E-LAN Services............................................................................1207
A.7.3.12 Changing Logical Ports Connected to a VB....................................................................................................1209
A.7.3.13 Deleting an E-Line Service..............................................................................................................................1210
A.7.3.14 Deleting E-LAN Services................................................................................................................................1210
A.7.4 Managing the MAC Address Table......................................................................................................................1211
A.7.4.1 Creating a Static MAC Address Entry...............................................................................................................1211
A.7.4.2 Creating a Blacklist Entry of MAC Addresses..................................................................................................1212
A.7.4.3 Configuring the Aging Parameters of a MAC Address Table...........................................................................1213
A.7.4.4 Querying or Deleting a Dynamic MAC Address..............................................................................................1213
A.7.5 Setting the Mode for Processing an Unknown Frame of the E-LAN Service......................................................1214
A.7.6 Managing the MSTP.............................................................................................................................................1215
A.7.6.1 Creating the MSTP Port Group.........................................................................................................................1215
A.7.6.2 Setting the Bridge Parameters of the MSTP......................................................................................................1216
A.7.6.3 Setting the Parameters of the CIST...................................................................................................................1217
A.7.6.4 Querying the CIST Running Information..........................................................................................................1218
A.7.6.5 Changing the Spanning Tree Protocol Used by the Port Group........................................................................1219
A.7.6.6 Enabling/Disabling the MSTP Protocol............................................................................................................1219
A.7.6.7 Modifying the Configuration Data of the MSTP Port Group............................................................................1220
A.7.7 Managing the QoS................................................................................................................................................1221
A.7.7.1 Creating a DS Domain.......................................................................................................................................1221
A.7.7.2 Modifying the Mapping Relationships for the DS Domain...............................................................................1223
A.7.7.3 Changing the Ports Applied to a DS Domain and Their Trusted Packet Types................................................1225
A.7.7.4 Creating a Port Policy........................................................................................................................................1227
A.7.7.5 Modifying the Port Policy.................................................................................................................................1229
A.7.7.6 Creating Traffic.................................................................................................................................................1230
A.7.7.7 Setting the Port That Uses the Port Policy.........................................................................................................1231

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxiv


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) Contents

A.7.7.8 Configuring Port Shaping..................................................................................................................................1233


A.7.7.9 Querying the Port Policy...................................................................................................................................1234
A.7.7.10 Querying the DS Domain of a Port..................................................................................................................1235
A.7.8 Using the IEEE 802.1ag OAM.............................................................................................................................1236
A.7.8.1 Creating an MD.................................................................................................................................................1236
A.7.8.2 Creating an MA.................................................................................................................................................1237
A.7.8.3 Creating MEPs...................................................................................................................................................1238
A.7.8.4 Creating Remote MEPs in an MA.....................................................................................................................1239
A.7.8.5 Creating MIPs....................................................................................................................................................1240
A.7.8.6 Performing a CC Test........................................................................................................................................1241
A.7.8.7 Performing an LB Test......................................................................................................................................1242
A.7.8.8 Performing an LT Test.......................................................................................................................................1243
A.7.8.9 Activating the AIS.............................................................................................................................................1245
A.7.8.10 Monitoring Packet Loss Ratio, Delay, or Delay Variation of Ethernet Services............................................1245
A.7.8.11 E-LAN Service Loopback Detection...............................................................................................................1246
A.7.8.12 Reactivating E-LAN Services..........................................................................................................................1247
A.7.9 Using the IEEE 802.3ah OAM ............................................................................................................................1248
A.7.9.1 Enabling the OAM Auto-Discovery Function...................................................................................................1248
A.7.9.2 Enabling the Link Event Notification ...............................................................................................................1249
A.7.9.3 Modifying the OAM Error Frame Monitoring Threshold ................................................................................1249
A.7.9.4 Performing Remote Loopbacks.........................................................................................................................1250
A.7.9.5 Enabling Self-Loop Detection...........................................................................................................................1252
A.7.10 LPT Configuration..............................................................................................................................................1252
A.7.10.1 Configuring Point-to-Point LPT Traversing an L2 Network..........................................................................1252
A.7.10.2 Configuring Point-to-Point LPT Traversing a PSN or QinQ Network...........................................................1253
A.7.10.3 Configuring Point-to-Multipoint LPT.............................................................................................................1254
A.7.10.4 Configuring Simple LPT.................................................................................................................................1255
A.8 Configuring Ethernet Services and Features on the EoS/EoPDH Plane.................................................................1256
A.8.1 Managing ERPS....................................................................................................................................................1256
A.8.1.1 Creating ERPS Instances...................................................................................................................................1256
A.8.1.2 Setting the Parameters of the ERPS Protocol....................................................................................................1257
A.8.1.3 Querying the Status of the ERPS Protocol........................................................................................................1258
A.8.2 Managing LAGs ..................................................................................................................................................1258
A.8.2.1 Creating a LAG..................................................................................................................................................1258
A.8.2.2 Setting Parameters for LAGs.............................................................................................................................1260
A.8.2.3 Querying the Protocol Information of LAGs.....................................................................................................1261
A.8.3 Configuring Ethernet Services..............................................................................................................................1262
A.8.3.1 Creating Ethernet Private Line Services............................................................................................................1262
A.8.3.2 Creating Ethernet LAN Services.......................................................................................................................1264
A.8.3.3 Changing the Ports Connected to a VB.............................................................................................................1268
A.8.3.4 Creating the VLAN Filtering Table...................................................................................................................1269

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxv


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) Contents

A.8.3.5 Creating QinQ-Based EVPL Services...............................................................................................................1270


A.8.3.6 Creating IEEE 802.1ad Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services................................................................................1272
A.8.3.7 Deleting an Ethernet Private Line Service.........................................................................................................1275
A.8.3.8 Deleting an Ethernet LAN Service....................................................................................................................1276
A.8.4 Managing the MAC Address Table......................................................................................................................1276
A.8.4.1 Creating a Static MAC Address Entry...............................................................................................................1277
A.8.4.2 Creating a Blacklist Entry of a MAC Address..................................................................................................1277
A.8.4.3 Setting the Aging Time of a MAC Address Table Entry .................................................................................1278
A.8.4.4 Querying or Deleting a Dynamic MAC Address..............................................................................................1279
A.8.4.5 Querying the Actual Capacity of a MAC Address Table..................................................................................1279
A.8.5 Configuring Ethernet Ports...................................................................................................................................1280
A.8.5.1 Configuring External Ethernet Ports.................................................................................................................1280
A.8.5.2 Configuring VCTRUNKs on an Ethernet Board...............................................................................................1282
A.8.5.3 Modifying the Type Field of QinQ Frames.......................................................................................................1284
A.8.5.4 Dynamically Increasing/Decreasing the VCTRUNK Bandwidth.....................................................................1285
A.8.6 Managing the Spanning Tree Protocol.................................................................................................................1286
A.8.6.1 Configuring the Type and Enabled Status of the Spanning Tree Protocol........................................................1286
A.8.6.2 Setting the Parameters of Spanning Tree Protocol............................................................................................1287
A.8.6.3 Querying the Running Information About the Spanning Tree Protocol............................................................1288
A.8.7 Managing the IGMP Snooping Protocol..............................................................................................................1289
A.8.7.1 Configuring the IGMP Snooping Protocol........................................................................................................1289
A.8.7.2 Configuring Static Multicast Entries.................................................................................................................1290
A.8.7.3 Modifying the Aging Time of a Multicast Table Entry.....................................................................................1291
A.8.7.4 Querying the Running Information of the IGMP Snooping Protocol...............................................................1292
A.8.8 Managing the QoS................................................................................................................................................1292
A.8.8.1 Creating a Flow..................................................................................................................................................1293
A.8.8.2 Creating the CAR..............................................................................................................................................1293
A.8.8.3 Creating the CoS................................................................................................................................................1294
A.8.8.4 Binding the CAR/CoS.......................................................................................................................................1296
A.8.8.5 Configuring Traffic Shaping for Egress Queues...............................................................................................1297
A.8.8.6 Configuring Port Shaping..................................................................................................................................1298
A.8.8.7 Setting Egress Queue Scheduling Policies........................................................................................................1298
A.8.9 Using the Ethernet service OAM..........................................................................................................................1299
A.8.9.1 Creating MDs.....................................................................................................................................................1299
A.8.9.2 Creating MAs.....................................................................................................................................................1300
A.8.9.3 Creating MPs.....................................................................................................................................................1301
A.8.9.4 Performing a CC Test........................................................................................................................................1303
A.8.9.5 Performing an LB Test......................................................................................................................................1304
A.8.9.6 Performing an LT Test.......................................................................................................................................1305
A.8.9.7 Activating the AIS.............................................................................................................................................1306
A.8.9.8 Performing a Ping Test .....................................................................................................................................1307

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxvi


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) Contents

A.8.9.9 Performing Performance Check........................................................................................................................1308


A.8.10 Using the Ethernet port OAM.............................................................................................................................1308
A.8.10.1 Enabling the OAM Auto-Discovery Function.................................................................................................1308
A.8.10.2 Enabling the Link Event Notification..............................................................................................................1310
A.8.10.3 Modifying the OAM Error Frame Monitoring Threshold...............................................................................1311
A.8.10.4 Performing the Remote Loopback...................................................................................................................1312
A.8.11 Configuring LPT.................................................................................................................................................1312
A.8.11.1 Configuring LPT for Point-to-Point Services..................................................................................................1313
A.8.11.2 Configuring LPT for Point-to-Multipoint Services.........................................................................................1314
A.9 Managing MPLS/PWE3 Services and Features......................................................................................................1315
A.9.1 Managing Address Resolution..............................................................................................................................1315
A.9.1.1 Creating ARP Static Entries..............................................................................................................................1316
A.9.1.2 Querying ARP Entries.......................................................................................................................................1316
A.9.1.3 Converting Dynamic ARP Entries to Static ARP Entries.................................................................................1317
A.9.1.4 Deleting Static ARP Entries..............................................................................................................................1317
A.9.1.5 Setting ARP Aging Time...................................................................................................................................1318
A.9.2 Managing MPLS Tunnels.....................................................................................................................................1318
A.9.2.1 Setting Basic MPLS Attributes..........................................................................................................................1318
A.9.2.2 Creating a Unidirectional MPLS Tunnel...........................................................................................................1319
A.9.2.3 Creating a Bidirectional MPLS Tunnel.............................................................................................................1320
A.9.2.4 Querying MPLS Tunnel Information................................................................................................................1322
A.9.2.5 Changing MPLS Tunnel Information................................................................................................................1322
A.9.2.6 Deleting MPLS Tunnels....................................................................................................................................1323
A.9.2.7 Setting MPLS OAM Parameters.......................................................................................................................1323
A.9.2.8 Enabling/Disabling FDI.....................................................................................................................................1324
A.9.2.9 Starting/Stopping CV/FFD Detection for MPLS Tunnels.................................................................................1325
A.9.2.10 Querying LSP Running Status.........................................................................................................................1326
A.9.2.11 Clearing OAM Configuration Data for MPLS Tunnels..................................................................................1326
A.9.2.12 Performing an LSP Ping Test..........................................................................................................................1327
A.9.2.13 Performing an LSP Traceroute Test................................................................................................................1328
A.9.3 Managing MPLS APS Protection Groups............................................................................................................1329
A.9.3.1 Creating an MPLS APS Protection Group........................................................................................................1329
A.9.3.2 Querying MPLS APS Status..............................................................................................................................1331
A.9.3.3 Triggering MPLS APS Switching.....................................................................................................................1331
A.9.3.4 Enabling/Disabling MPLS APS Protection.......................................................................................................1332
A.9.4 Managing PWs......................................................................................................................................................1333
A.9.4.1 Querying Information and Running Status of PWs...........................................................................................1333
A.9.4.2 Creating an MS-PW...........................................................................................................................................1334
A.9.4.3 Setting PW OAM Parameters............................................................................................................................1336
A.9.4.4 Performing a PW Ping Test...............................................................................................................................1336
A.9.4.5 Performing a PW Traceroute Test.....................................................................................................................1337

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxvii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) Contents

A.9.5 Managing a PW APS Protection Group...............................................................................................................1338


A.9.5.1 Creating a PW APS Protection Group...............................................................................................................1338
A.9.5.2 Configuring Slave Protection Pairs of PW APS................................................................................................1340
A.9.5.3 Querying PW APS Status..................................................................................................................................1342
A.9.5.4 Triggering PW APS Switching..........................................................................................................................1343
A.9.5.5 Enabling/Disabling PW APS Protection...........................................................................................................1344
A.9.6 Managing CES Services.......................................................................................................................................1345
A.9.6.1 Creating CES Services.......................................................................................................................................1345
A.9.6.2 Modifying CES Service Parameters..................................................................................................................1347
A.9.6.3 Querying CES Service Information...................................................................................................................1348
A.9.6.4 Deleting a CES Service.....................................................................................................................................1349
A.9.7 Managing ATM/IMA Ports..................................................................................................................................1349
A.9.7.1 Binding ATM TRUNKs....................................................................................................................................1349
A.9.7.2 Configuring an IMA group ...............................................................................................................................1351
A.9.7.3 Setting ATM Port Parameters............................................................................................................................1351
A.9.7.4 Querying Running Status of an IMA Group......................................................................................................1352
A.9.7.5 Querying Link Running Status of an IMA Group.............................................................................................1353
A.9.8 Managing ATM Services......................................................................................................................................1353
A.9.8.1 Creating ATM Services.....................................................................................................................................1353
A.9.8.2 Modifying ATM Service Parameters.................................................................................................................1356
A.9.8.3 Querying ATM Services....................................................................................................................................1357
A.9.8.4 Deleting an ATM Service..................................................................................................................................1357
A.9.9 ATM Traffic Management...................................................................................................................................1358
A.9.9.1 Creating an ATM-DiffServ Domain..................................................................................................................1358
A.9.9.2 Modifying an ATM-Diffserv Domain...............................................................................................................1359
A.9.9.3 Creating an ATM Policy....................................................................................................................................1360
A.9.9.4 Modifying an ATM Policy................................................................................................................................1361
A.9.10 Using ATM OAM...............................................................................................................................................1362
A.9.10.1 Setting Segment and End Attributes of AIS/RDI............................................................................................1362
A.9.10.2 Performing a Continuity Check Test...............................................................................................................1363
A.9.10.3 Querying or Setting LLIDs..............................................................................................................................1363
A.9.10.4 Performing an LB Test....................................................................................................................................1364
A.10 Managing the Clock...............................................................................................................................................1365
A.10.1 Managing Clocks at the Physical Layer.............................................................................................................1365
A.10.1.1 Configuring the Clock Sources........................................................................................................................1365
A.10.1.2 Configuring Clock Subnets..............................................................................................................................1366
A.10.1.3 User-Defined Clock Quality............................................................................................................................1367
A.10.1.4 Configuring the SSM Output Status................................................................................................................1368
A.10.1.5 Configuring the Clock ID Output Status.........................................................................................................1369
A.10.1.6 Modifying the Parameters of the Clock Output...............................................................................................1370
A.10.1.7 Configuring Clock Sources for External Clock Output...................................................................................1370

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxviii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) Contents

A.10.1.8 Changing the Conditions for Clock Source Switching....................................................................................1372


A.10.1.9 Modifying the Recovery Parameter of the Clock Source................................................................................1372
A.10.1.10 Querying the Clock Synchronization Status..................................................................................................1373
A.10.2 Managing CES ACR Clocks..............................................................................................................................1373
A.10.2.1 Configuring the Primary Clock for an ACR Clock Domain...........................................................................1373
A.10.2.2 Configuring Ports Using the Clock Domain....................................................................................................1374
A.11 Using the RMON...................................................................................................................................................1376
A.11.1 Browsing the Performance Data in the Statistics Group of a Port......................................................................1376
A.11.2 Configuring an Alarm Group for a Port.............................................................................................................1379
A.11.3 Configuring a Historical Control Group.............................................................................................................1382
A.11.4 Browsing the Performance Data in the Historical Group of a Port....................................................................1383
A.12 Configuring Auxiliary Ports and Functions...........................................................................................................1386
A.12.1 Configuring Orderwire.......................................................................................................................................1386
A.12.2 Configuring the Synchronous Data Service.......................................................................................................1387
A.12.3 Configuring the Asynchronous Data Service.....................................................................................................1388
A.12.4 Configuring the Wayside E1 Service.................................................................................................................1389
A.12.5 Configure External Alarms.................................................................................................................................1390
A.12.6 Monitoring the Outdoor Cabinet........................................................................................................................1391
A.12.6.1 Configuring the Function of an Auxiliary Port ...............................................................................................1391
A.12.6.2 Setting the Type of the Outdoor Cabinet.........................................................................................................1392
A.12.6.3 Querying and Setting the Temperature and Fan Information of the Outdoor Cabinet....................................1393
A.12.6.4 Querying and Setting the Information About the Power System of the Outdoor Cabinet..............................1394
A.12.6.5 Querying the Ambient Temperature and Humidity of the Outdoor Cabinet...................................................1395
A.12.6.6 Setting the Temperature and Humidity Alarm Thresholds for the PMU........................................................1396
A.13 End-to-End Configuration Task Collection...........................................................................................................1396
A.13.1 Configuring Native Ethernet Services (in an End-to-End Mode).......................................................................1397
A.13.1.1 Creating E-Line Services over Native Ethernet...............................................................................................1397
A.13.1.2 Creating E-LAN Services over Native Ethernet..............................................................................................1400
A.13.1.3 Managing E-Line Services Transmitted in Native Ethernet Mode..................................................................1405
A.13.1.4 Managing Discrete Services Transmitted in Native Ethernet Mode...............................................................1405
A.13.1.5 Adjusting an E-LAN Service Network............................................................................................................1406
A.13.2 Searching for MPLS Tunnels and PWE3 Services.............................................................................................1409
A.13.3 Configuring MPLS Tunnels in an End-to-End Mode.........................................................................................1411
A.13.3.1 Configuring Port IP Address Resources..........................................................................................................1411
A.13.3.2 Creating L2 Links............................................................................................................................................1412
A.13.3.3 Creating Non-Protection MPLS Tunnels (in an End-to-End Mode)...............................................................1413
A.13.3.4 Creating MPLS Tunnels Configured with MPLS APS Protection in an End-to-End Mode...........................1416
A.13.3.5 Verifying MPLS Tunnels in an End-to-End Mode..........................................................................................1423
A.13.3.6 Managing MPLS Tunnels in an End-to-End Mode.........................................................................................1425
A.13.3.7 Managing Discrete MPLS Tunnels.................................................................................................................1425
A.13.3.8 Searching for MPLS APS Protection Groups..................................................................................................1426

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxix


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) Contents

A.13.3.9 Managing MPLS APS Protection Groups in an End-to-End Mode................................................................1426


A.13.4 Configuring PWE3 Services in an End-to-End Mode........................................................................................1427
A.13.4.1 Creating PWE3 Service Templates.................................................................................................................1427
A.13.4.2 Configuring CES Services in an End-to-End Mode........................................................................................1428
A.13.4.3 Configuring an ATM Policy Profile................................................................................................................1431
A.13.4.4 Configuring an ATM CoS Mapping Profile....................................................................................................1432
A.13.4.5 Configuring ATM Services in an End-to-End Mode......................................................................................1434
A.13.4.6 Configuring PW-Based E-Line Services (in an End-to-End Mode)................................................................1436
A.13.4.7 Verifying PW Configurations in an End-to-End Mode...................................................................................1439
A.13.4.8 Verifying PW-Based E-Line Service Configurations (in an End-to-End Mode)............................................1442
A.13.4.9 Managing and Maintaining PWE3 Services....................................................................................................1444
A.13.4.10 Managing Discrete PWE3 Services...............................................................................................................1445
A.14 Verifying Services and Features............................................................................................................................1445
A.14.1 Testing E1 Services Using PRBS.......................................................................................................................1445
A.14.2 Testing E1 Services by Using a BER Tester......................................................................................................1447
A.14.3 Testing Ethernet Services...................................................................................................................................1449
A.14.4 Testing ATM Services........................................................................................................................................1454
A.14.5 Testing AM Switching........................................................................................................................................1457
A.14.5.1 Testing AM Switching by Using a BER Tester...............................................................................................1457
A.14.5.2 Testing AM Switching Without a BER Tester................................................................................................1459
A.14.6 Testing Protection Switching..............................................................................................................................1461
A.14.6.1 Testing IF 1+1 Switching................................................................................................................................1461
A.14.6.2 Testing N+1 Protection Switching...................................................................................................................1464
A.14.6.3 Testing SNCP Switching.................................................................................................................................1467
A.14.6.4 Testing ERPS Switching..................................................................................................................................1471
A.14.6.5 Testing MPLS APS Protection Switching.......................................................................................................1473
A.14.6.6 Testing Linear MSP Switching........................................................................................................................1476
A.14.6.7 Switching the System Control Unit and the Cross-Connect Unit....................................................................1480

B Parameters Description..........................................................................................................1481
B.1 Parameters for Network Management.....................................................................................................................1482
B.1.1 Parameters for NE Management...........................................................................................................................1482
B.1.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching...............................................................................................................1482
B.1.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation.................................................................................................................1487
B.1.1.3 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs........................................................................................1489
B.1.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization............................................................................................1490
B.1.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time..................................................................1493
B.1.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management.................................................................................1495
B.1.1.7 Parameter Description: License Management...................................................................................................1496
B.1.1.8 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs.............................................................1497
B.1.2 Parameters for Communications Management.....................................................................................................1497
B.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting........................................................................1498

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxx


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) Contents

B.1.2.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration..............................................................1499


B.1.2.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management.............................1501
B.1.2.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC........................................................1503
B.1.2.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management.........................................................................................1505
B.1.2.6 Parameter Description: ECC Link Management_Availability Test..................................................................1506
B.1.2.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management..............................................1507
B.1.2.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation...............................1508
B.1.2.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_Availability Test.......................................................1509
B.1.2.10 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings.......................................1510
B.1.2.11 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP...................................................................................1516
B.1.2.12 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas.......................................................................1517
B.1.2.13 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas_Adding OSPF Areas....................................1518
B.1.2.14 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas_Adding Routes to Be Manually Aggregated
........................................................................................................................................................................................1520
B.1.2.15 Parameter Description: Port OSPF Setting......................................................................................................1520
B.1.2.16 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter............................................................1521
B.1.2.17 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table..............................................................................1522
B.1.2.18 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel...................................................................................1523
B.1.2.19 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Port Parameters....................................................................1528
B.1.2.20 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management............................................................1528
B.1.2.21 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting................................................................................1529
B.1.2.22 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Access Control...........................................................................1530
B.1.2.23 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Packet Control...........................................................................1531
B.1.2.24 Parameter Description: L2 DCN Management................................................................................................1532
B.1.2.25 Parameter Description: Access Control...........................................................................................................1533
B.1.3 Parameters for Network Security Management....................................................................................................1534
B.1.3.1 Parameter Description: NE User Management..................................................................................................1534
B.1.3.2 Parameter Description: NE User Management_Creation..................................................................................1535
B.1.3.3 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control....................................................................................................1537
B.1.3.4 Parameter Description: RADIUS Configuration_Creation...............................................................................1538
B.1.3.5 Parameter Description: RADIUS Configuration_RADIUS Server...................................................................1539
B.1.3.6 Parameter Description: Enabling/Disabling the RADIUS Function.................................................................1541
B.2 Radio Link Parameters.............................................................................................................................................1541
B.2.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation...........................................................1541
B.2.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC..............................................................................................1546
B.2.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create....................................................................................................1553
B.2.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection................................................................................................................1554
B.2.5 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection_Create................................................................................................1556
B.2.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection............................................................................................................1559
B.2.7 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_Creating a PLA Group...................................................................1563
B.2.8 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_PLA................................................................................................1564
B.2.9 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration......................................................................................1565

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxi


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) Contents

B.3 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters.................................................................................................................1576


B.3.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation.....................................................................................................1576
B.3.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP.....................................................................................................................1580
B.4 SDH/PDH Service Parameters.................................................................................................................................1584
B.4.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation............................................................................1584
B.4.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation....................................................1586
B.4.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services...........1590
B.4.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration............................................................................................1594
B.4.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control....................................................................................................1597
B.4.6 Parameter Description: TU_AIS Insertion............................................................................................................1600
B.5 Parameters for Board Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1601
B.5.1 PDH Port Parameters............................................................................................................................................1601
B.5.1.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes........................................................................................1601
B.5.1.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes.................................................................................1602
B.5.2 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards........................................................................................................1606
B.5.2.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes.............................................................................1606
B.5.2.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control.................................................................................1611
B.5.2.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes..........................................................................1613
B.5.2.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes.................................................................................1616
B.5.2.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes......................................................................1618
B.5.3 Serial Port Parameters...........................................................................................................................................1620
B.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Basic Attributes.........................................................................................1620
B.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Creation of Serial Ports.............................................................................1622
B.5.4 Microwave Interface Parameters..........................................................................................................................1623
B.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes........................................................................1623
B.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes.....................................................................1624
B.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes.....................................................................1626
B.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes.................................................................1628
B.5.5 IF Board Parameters.............................................................................................................................................1632
B.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute..............................................................................................1632
B.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute.......................................................................................1640
B.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes.......................................................1642
B.5.5.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records..........................................................................................1643
B.5.5.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test....................................................................................................................1644
B.5.6 ODU Parameters...................................................................................................................................................1645
B.5.6.1 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute.................................................................1645
B.5.6.2 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes.................................................................................1647
B.5.6.3 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information......................................................................1650
B.5.6.4 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes...........................................................................1652
B.5.7 Parameters for SDH Interface Boards...................................................................................................................1653
B.5.7.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces.............................................................................................................1653

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) Contents

B.5.7.2 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown..........................................................................................1655


B.5.8 Parameters for PDH Interface Boards...................................................................................................................1655
B.5.8.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports....................................................................................................................1656
B.5.8.2 Parameter Description: PRBS Test....................................................................................................................1659
B.5.9 Parameters for Overhead.......................................................................................................................................1660
B.5.9.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead.....................................................................................1660
B.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs..................................................................................................................1661
B.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs................................................................................................................1663
B.5.10 Parameter Description: Ethernet Virtual Interfaces............................................................................................1664
B.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the Packet Plane.........................................................1667
B.6.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services..........................................................................................................................1667
B.6.1.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation..............................................................................................1667
B.6.1.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service..............................................................................................................1689
B.6.1.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Items for E-Line Services_Creation...................................1700
B.6.1.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation.............................................................................................1701
B.6.1.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service.............................................................................................................1707
B.6.1.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation....................................................................................................1719
B.6.1.7 Parameter Description: E-AGGR Services_Creation........................................................................................1720
B.6.1.8 Parameter Description: E-AGGR Services........................................................................................................1727
B.6.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols........................................................................................................................1732
B.6.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation......................................................................................1732
B.6.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management......................................................................................................1735
B.6.2.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation.................................................................1741
B.6.2.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration........................................................1743
B.6.2.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters...................................................................1744
B.6.2.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters......................................................................1749
B.6.2.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST.....................................1751
B.6.2.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation............................................1761
B.6.2.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation............................................................1768
B.6.2.10 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Point LPT......................................................................1769
B.6.2.11 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Point LPT.......................................................1772
B.6.2.12 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Multipoint LPT.............................................................1772
B.6.2.13 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Multipoint LPT..............................................1776
B.6.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM........................................................................................................................1780
B.6.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain Creation........................1780
B.6.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association Creation..................1781
B.6.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation..................................................1782
B.6.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation....................................1783
B.6.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation...................................................1784
B.6.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling....................................................1785
B.6.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling.....................................................1787

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxiii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) Contents

B.6.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling Service Loopback Detection..................................1789


B.6.3.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter....................................................1789
B.6.3.10 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring...........................1791
B.6.4 QoS Parameters.....................................................................................................................................................1793
B.6.4.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management.....................................................................................1793
B.6.4.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create.......................................................................1799
B.6.4.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification.............................................................1806
B.6.4.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management.....................................................................................................1808
B.6.4.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy....................................................................................................................1814
B.6.4.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration........................................................1821
B.6.4.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation...........................................................................1832
B.7 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the EoS/EoPDH Plane...............................................1834
B.7.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services..........................................................................................................................1834
B.7.1.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creation...................................................................................1834
B.7.1.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creating QinQ-Based Ethernet Line Services.........................1838
B.7.1.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service...................................................................................................1842
B.7.1.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creation of Ethernet LAN Services Based on IEEE 802.1d/802.1q
Bridge.............................................................................................................................................................................1844
B.7.1.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creating IEEE 802.1ad Bridge-Based Ethernet LAN Service
........................................................................................................................................................................................1848
B.7.1.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service..................................................................................................1853
B.7.1.7 Parameter Description: VLAN Filtering Table_Creation..................................................................................1860
B.7.1.8 Parameter Description: Aging Time of MAC Address Table Entries...............................................................1861
B.7.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols........................................................................................................................1862
B.7.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation......................................................................................1862
B.7.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management......................................................................................................1865
B.7.2.3 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Protocol Enabling...............................................................................1871
B.7.2.4 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Parameters...............................................................................1872
B.7.2.5 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Parameters...................................................................................1874
B.7.2.6 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Running Information..............................................................1875
B.7.2.7 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Running Information...................................................................1876
B.7.2.8 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Point-to-Point Attribute......................................................................1877
B.7.2.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Enabling............................................................................1878
B.7.2.10 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Creation of Static Multicast Table Entries......................1880
B.7.2.11 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Aging Time of Multicast Table Entries..........................1880
B.7.2.12 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Creation of LAGs..........................................................1881
B.7.2.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation..........................................................1883
B.7.2.14 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Point Service LPT......................................1885
B.7.2.15 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Multipoint Service LPT.............................1886
B.7.2.16 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation............................................................................................1887
B.7.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM........................................................................................................................1888
B.7.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MDs....................................................................1888

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxiv


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) Contents

B.7.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MAs....................................................................1889


B.7.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MPs....................................................................1890
B.7.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LB..........................................................................1892
B.7.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LT..........................................................................1893
B.7.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Parameter..........................................................................1894
B.7.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Error Frame Monitoring...................................................1895
B.7.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_Remote OAM Parameter............................................................1896
B.7.4 QoS Parameters.....................................................................................................................................................1897
B.7.4.1 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of Flows..........................................................................1897
B.7.4.2 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR...........................................................................1900
B.7.4.3 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CoS.............................................................................1902
B.7.4.4 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR/CoS...................................................................1904
B.7.4.5 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Shaping Management of Egress Queues.......................................1905
B.7.4.6 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Port Shaping..................................................................................1907
B.7.5 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards........................................................................................................1908
B.7.5.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_External Port.........................................................................................1908
B.7.5.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Internal Port..........................................................................................1916
B.7.5.3 Parameter Description: Type Field of QinQ Frames.........................................................................................1922
B.8 RMON Parameters...................................................................................................................................................1923
B.8.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group............................................................................1923
B.8.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group..............................................................................1924
B.8.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control Group.................................................................1925
B.8.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting.............................................................................1926
B.9 Parameters for MPLS/PWE3 Services.....................................................................................................................1928
B.9.1 MPLS Tunnel Parameters.....................................................................................................................................1929
B.9.1.1 Parameter Description: Basic Configurations of MPLS Tunnels......................................................................1929
B.9.1.2 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Static Tunnel................................................................1930
B.9.1.3 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Unidirectional Tunnels.............................1934
B.9.1.4 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Bidirectional Tunnels...............................1938
B.9.1.5 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_OAM Parameters.........................................................1943
B.9.1.6 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_FDI...............................................................................1949
B.9.1.7 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Ping......................................................................1950
B.9.1.8 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Traceroute............................................................1953
B.9.1.9 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Management............................................................................1956
B.9.1.10 Parameter Description: PW Management_MS-PW Creation..........................................................................1962
B.9.1.11 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW OAM.....................................................................................1972
B.9.1.12 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Ping.......................................................................................1976
B.9.1.13 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Traceroute.............................................................................1979
B.9.1.14 Parameter Description: MPLS APS Protection Management.........................................................................1982
B.9.1.15 Parameter Description: Tunnel Protection Group_Creation............................................................................1986
B.9.1.16 Parameter Description: PW APS Protection Group_Creation.........................................................................1991

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxv


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) Contents

B.9.1.17 Parameter Description: Slave Protection Pair of a PW APS Protection Group_Creation...............................2002


B.9.2 CES Parameters....................................................................................................................................................2008
B.9.2.1 Parameter Description: CES Service Management...........................................................................................2008
B.9.2.2 Parameter Description: CES Service Management_Creation............................................................................2018
B.9.3 ATM Parameters...................................................................................................................................................2032
B.9.3.1 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Management...................................................2032
B.9.3.2 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_Bound Path Configuration..................................................2038
B.9.3.3 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Status..............................................................2039
B.9.3.4 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Link Status.................................................................2040
B.9.3.5 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_ATM Interface Management..............................................2041
B.9.3.6 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table.................................................2043
B.9.3.7 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table_Creation.................................2044
B.9.3.8 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management............................................................................................2046
B.9.3.9 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management_Creation............................................................................2051
B.9.3.10 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management........................................................................................2056
B.9.3.11 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management_Creation........................................................................2066
B.9.3.12 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Segment and End Attributes...........................................2079
B.9.3.13 Parameter Description: ATM OMA Management_CC Activation Status......................................................2082
B.9.3.14 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Remote End Loopback Status.........................................2087
B.9.3.15 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_LLID...............................................................................2089
B.10 Clock Parameters...................................................................................................................................................2090
B.10.1 Physical Clock Parameters..................................................................................................................................2090
B.10.1.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table.......................................................................................2090
B.10.1.2 Parameter Description: Priority Table for the PLL Clock Source of the External Clock Port........................2092
B.10.1.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet..........................................................................2094
B.10.1.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality.........................................................................2097
B.10.1.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control...............................................................2100
B.10.1.6 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status.......................................................2101
B.10.1.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters...............................2103
B.10.1.8 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching....................................................2105
B.10.1.9 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching Conditions.................................2106
B.10.1.10 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source...................................2108
B.10.1.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status..................................................................................2110
B.10.2 CES ACR Clock Parameters...............................................................................................................................2112
B.10.2.1 Parameter Description: ACR Clock Source.....................................................................................................2112
B.10.2.2 Parameter Description: Clock Domain............................................................................................................2112
B.10.2.3 Parameter Description: Clock Domain_Creation............................................................................................2113
B.10.3 Parameter Description: Auxiliary Ports..............................................................................................................2114
B.11 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces.........................................................................................2115
B.11.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General........................................................................................................2115
B.11.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced....................................................................................................2117

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxvi


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) Contents

B.11.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port................................................................................................2118


B.11.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port....................................................................................2119
B.11.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface...............................................................................2120

C Glossary....................................................................................................................................2124

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxvii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 1 Configuration Preparations

1 Configuration Preparations

About This Chapter

Before configuring the NE data, you must make the required preparations.

1.1 Preparing Documents and Tools


The relevant documents and tools must be available to ensure the proper configuration of data.

1.2 Checking Configuration Conditions


Before the configuration, check whether the configuration conditions meet the requirements.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 1 Configuration Preparations

1.1 Preparing Documents and Tools


The relevant documents and tools must be available to ensure the proper configuration of data.

Documents
l Network planning documents, such as the XXX Network Planning
l OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Configuration Guide

Tools
l A computer where the U2000 server software is installed
l A computer where the U2000 client software is installed
NOTE
For information about the software and hardware required for the U2000 and the installation method, see the
documents that accompany the U2000.

1.2 Checking Configuration Conditions


Before the configuration, check whether the configuration conditions meet the requirements.

Context
Ensure that the following requirements are met:

l All the NEs on the network must be powered on properly.


l The DCN communication between the gateway NE and the non-gateway NEs must be
normal.
l The network communication between the U2000 server and the gateway NE must be
normal.
l The U2000 client can log in to the U2000 server and has the "network operator" authority
or higher.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 2 U2000 Quick Start

2 U2000 Quick Start

The U2000 quick start guide helps to learn about basic operations on the U2000 client.

For details, see A.1 U2000 Quick Start.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 3 Specifying the Configuration Procedure

3 Specifying the Configuration Procedure

You can select the proper configuration procedure according to the actual configuration
scenarios.

Initial Configuration
Initial configuration of a radio network refers to configuring network-wide service data by using
the NMS for the first time after the NE commissioning is complete. Figure 3-1 shows the
configuration procedure.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 3 Specifying the Configuration Procedure

Figure 3-1 Configuration flowchart (initial configuration)

Start

Configuring the network topology

Configuring radio links

Configuring TDM services

Configuring Packet-Based Ethernet


services

Configuring EoS/EoPDH-Based
Ethernet services

Configuring MPLS packet services

Configuring the clock

Configuring auxiliary ports and


functions

End
Required

Optional

Table 3-1 describes the procedure in the configuration flowchart.

Table 3-1 Initial configuration

Operation Description

5 Configuring the Network Topology Required.

6 Configuring Radio Links Required.

7 Configuring TDM Services Required when TDM services need to be


transmitted.

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services Required when Native Ethernet services based
on the Packet Plane on the packet plane need to be transmitted.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 3 Specifying the Configuration Procedure

Operation Description

9 Configuring EoS/EoPDH-Based Required when Ethernet services based on the


Ethernet Services EoS/EoPDH plane need to be transmitted.

Configuring MPLS 10 Configuring Required when MPLS packet services need to


packet services MPLS Tunnels be transmitted.

11 Configuring
PWE3 Services

12 Configuring the Clock Required.

13 Configuring Auxiliary Ports and Required when orderwire information, wayside


Functions E1 services, or synchronous/asynchronous data
services need to be transmitted or when the
external alarm input/output function or the
outdoor cabinet monitoring function needs to be
enabled.

NOTE

The configuration sequence provided in Table 3-1 is for reference only and needs to be adjusted as required in
actual application scenarios.

Network Adjustment
Network adjustment involves adding and adjusting configuration data in the equipment
commissioning and operation phases. You can find the corresponding configuration operations
according to the actual network adjustment requirements in Table 3-2.

Table 3-2 Network adjustment

Operation Description

14.1 Common Task Collection (Network This common task collection lists configuration
Topology) operations associated with NE attributes,
including changing the ID and IP address of an
NE.

14.2 Common Task Collection (Radio This common task collection lists configuration
Links) operations associated with radio links, including
changing the working mode of a TDM radio link
and changing the number of E1s on a Hybrid
radio link.

14.3 Common Task Collection (TDM This common task collection lists configuration
Services) operations associated with TDM services,
including deleting TDM services and upgrading
a normal service to an SNCP service.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 3 Specifying the Configuration Procedure

Operation Description

14.4 Common Task Collection (Packet- This common task collection lists configuration
Plane Ethernet Services) operations associated with Native Ethernet
services based on the packet plane, including
setting or modifying Ethernet port parameters
and deleting Ethernet services.

14.5 Task Collection (EoS/EoPDH- This common task collection lists configuration
Plane Ethernet Services) operations associated with Ethernet services
based on the EoS/EoPDH plane, including
setting or modifying Ethernet port parameters
and deleting Ethernet services.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 4 Common Network Scenarios of Configuration Examples

4 Common Network Scenarios of


Configuration Examples

About This Chapter

Initial configuration examples of each section are provided in the same TDM radio network
scenario or IP radio network scenario.

4.1 Common Network Scenario of the TDM Radio Network


Initial configuration examples are provided in a common network scenario of the TDM radio
network where a TDM radio chain network and a TDM radio ring network are interconnected
through a third-party SDH network.

4.2 Common Network Scenario of the IP Radio Network


Initial configuration examples are provided in a common network scenario of the IP radio
network where a Hybrid radio chain network, a Hybrid radio ring network, and a packet network
are interconnected. The packet network is a GE packet ring that includes packet radio links.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 4 Common Network Scenarios of Configuration Examples

4.1 Common Network Scenario of the TDM Radio Network


Initial configuration examples are provided in a common network scenario of the TDM radio
network where a TDM radio chain network and a TDM radio ring network are interconnected
through a third-party SDH network.

Overall Topology
Figure 4-1 shows the overall topology of the TDM radio network. On this network, base station
backhaul services are converged at a TDM radio chain network and a TDM radio ring network
and then are transmitted over a third-party SDH network to the BSC.

Figure 4-1 Overall topology of the TDM radio network

STM-1
TDM radio chain Third party SDH network
network
BSC

E1

TDM radio ring


network

TDM Radio Chain Network


Figure 4-2 shows the topology of a TDM radio chain network. In this topology, all base stations
are 2G base stations connected to NEs at E1 ports. The base station backhaul services converged
from the TDM radio chain network are transmitted over the third-party SDH network to the
BSC. The TDM radio chain network and TDM radio ring network are interconnected through
STM-1 fiber links configured with linear MSP.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 4 Common Network Scenarios of Configuration Examples

Figure 4-2 Topology of the TDM radio chain network


NMS

E1
BTS12 DCN

STM-1
E1 Third party
NE14
SDH network
BTS13
E1 STM-1
NE13 NE12 NE11

E1 BTS11
E1
NE16 NE15

BTS15 BTS14

Figure 4-3 shows the board configuration of each NE on the radio network.

Figure 4-3 Board configuration of NEs on the TDM radio chain network

NE13 NE12 NE11


NE14 CST CST CST
CST IF1 IF1 IF1 IF1
E1 NE6 NE6 NE6
IF1 BTS12 IF1 IF1 IF1 IF1
NE6
IF1 SL1D SL1D SP3S SL1D
SP3S
STM-1
E1 E1
Third party
BTS13 SDH netw ork
BTS11
STM-1

CST CST
IF1
NE6
IF1 NE6
IF1 IF1
SP3S SP3S
NE16 NE15 E1
E1
BTS14
BTS15

TDM Radio Ring Network


Figure 4-4 shows the topology of a TDM radio ring network. In this topology, all base stations
are 2G base stations connected to NEs at E1 ports. The TDM radio ring network is interconnected
with a third-party SDH network by using E1 cables. Therefore, the base station backhaul services
converged from the TDM radio ring network are transmitted over the third-party SDH network
to the BSC.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 4 Common Network Scenarios of Configuration Examples

Figure 4-4 Topology of the TDM radio ring network

NMS
DCN

Third party E1
SDH network NE21

BTS21

NE22 NE24 BTS24

BTS22

NE23

BTS23

Figure 4-5 shows the board configuration of each NE on the radio network.

Figure 4-5 Board configuration of NEs on the TDM radio ring network
NE21
CST
IF1
NE6
IF1 IF1
Third party
SDH netw ork E1 SP3S

E1 NE22
CST NE24
BTS21
NE6 CST
IF1 IF1 IF1
SP3S NE6
IF1 IF1 E1
SP3S
E1
BTS22
BTS24

NE23
CST
NE6
IF1 IF1
SP3S

E1

BTS23

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 11


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 4 Common Network Scenarios of Configuration Examples

4.2 Common Network Scenario of the IP Radio Network


Initial configuration examples are provided in a common network scenario of the IP radio
network where a Hybrid radio chain network, a Hybrid radio ring network, and a packet network
are interconnected. The packet network is a GE packet ring that includes packet radio links.

Overall Topology
Figure 4-6 shows the overall topology of the IP radio network. The base station backhaul
services converged from a Hybrid radio chain network, a Hybrid radio ring network, and a packet
radio chain network are transmitted to the BSC/RNC over a GE packet ring.

Figure 4-6 Overall topology of the IP radio network

Packet radio chain


network

GE packet ring
NMS
Hybrid radio chain
network

BSC
Hybrid radio ring
network

RNC

Packet Network
Figure 4-7 shows the topology of the packet network. The packet network receives various base
station services and the base station backhaul services converged from a Hybrid radio chain
network and a Hybrid radio ring network. The base station services transmitted on the network
are:

l 2G base station services (CES services transmitted to the BSC from E1 ports)
l R99 base station services (ATM PWE3 services transmitted to the RNC from E1 ports)
l R4 base station services (ETH PWE3 services transmitted to the RNC from GE ports)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 12


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 4 Common Network Scenarios of Configuration Examples

Figure 4-7 Topology of the packet network


NE34
BTS33 NE33

FE
BTS31
R4
BTS32
E1 E1 R4
FE
R99
BTS34 GE GE
NE32
Hybrid radio chain
NE11 NE31 NMS
network
E1
GE
NE21 GE
E1

E1
E1

+G
BSC

E
BTS36 BTS35 Hybrid radio ring
network R99 R99
BTS37 BTS38

RNC

NOTE

l NE31 is an OptiX PTN NE in an actual network as it does not connect to any radio links. In this example,
NE31 is an IDU.
l NE11 receives base station services from BTS35 and BTS36 by using the Fractional E1 function.
l NE21 receives base station services from BTS37 and BTS38 by using the Fractional E1 function.

Figure 4-8 provides the board configuration of each NE on the packet network.

Figure 4-8 Board configuration of NEs on the packet network

NE34 NE33
CSH CSH
BTS33 ISX2
NE6
ISU2 NE6
ISU2 ISX2
EM6T ML1 ML1
FE
R4
E1 E1
BTS31
BTS34 R99 BTS32
FE
NE32
CSH R4
Hybrid radio chain ISX2
NE6
ISX2
network
NE11 EM6F NE31
CSH
GE GE CSH
ISU2
NE6 GE
ISU2 ML1 FE NE6
EM6T
SP3S EM6F GE
NE21 EM6F ML1
E1 CSH GE
GE E1 GE
ISU2 ML1 GE
BTS36 BTS35 NE6 ISU2
ISU2 E1
EM6F SP3S
E1
R99 R99 BSC RNC
BTS38 BTS37
Hybrid radio ring
network

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 13


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 4 Common Network Scenarios of Configuration Examples

NOTE

l The Native E1 services received by the Hybrid radio network are converted to CES services by cross-
connecting some E1 ports on the SP3S and ML1 boards of NE11 and NE21.
l The Native E-LAN services received by the Hybrid radio network are converted to E-Line services, which
can be carried by PWs, by cross-connecting some FE ports on the EM6F board of NE21. NE11 receives
Native E-Line services and does not require port cross-connections.
l The GE port connected to the RNC is configured into a LAG.

Hybrid Radio Chain Network


Figure 4-9 shows the topology of the Hybrid radio chain network. The Hybrid radio chain
network receives various base station services and transmits them to the packet network through
NE11. The base station services transmitted on the network are:

l R99 base station services (Native E1 services)


l R4 base station services (Native Ethernet services)

Figure 4-9 Topology of the Hybrid radio chain network

R4 FE
BTS12
E1+GE+
NE cascade
E1 NE14
R99 Packet network
BTS13 FE
NE13 NE12 NE11

R4
E1 BTS11
FE NE15
NE16
R99
R4
BTS14
BTS15

NOTE

The cascading ports of NE12 and NE13 are connected by using network cables for DCN communication.

Figure 4-10 shows the board configuration of each NE on the radio network.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 14


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 4 Common Network Scenarios of Configuration Examples

Figure 4-10 Board configuration of NEs on the Hybrid radio chain network

NE13 NE cascade NE12 Packet network


NE14 CSH CSH
CSH ISU2 ISU2 ISU2
NE6 NE6 NE11
ISU2 ISU2 ISU2 ISU2
NE6 EM6T SP3S EM6T SP3S
ISU2 E1
EM6T SP3S
R99 GE
FE E1
BTS13
FE R4
R4
BTS12 BTS11

NE16 NE15
CSH CSH
ISU2
NE6 NE6
ISU2 ISU2 ISU2
E1
EM6T SP3S R99
BTS14
FE
R4
BTS15

Hybrid Radio Ring Network


Figure 4-11 shows the topology of the Hybrid radio ring network. The Hybrid radio ring network
receives various base station services and transmits them to the packet network through NE21.
The base station services transmitted on the network are:
l 2G base station services (Native E1 services)
l R4 base station services (Native Ethernet services)

Figure 4-11 Topology of the Hybrid radio ring network

Packet network

NE21

R4 FE
BTS21 FE
R4
E1 NE22 NE24 BTS24

BTS22

FE
NE23
R4
BTS23

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 15


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 4 Common Network Scenarios of Configuration Examples

Figure 4-12 shows the board configuration of each NE on the radio network.

Figure 4-12 Board configuration of NEs on the Hybrid radio ring network

Packet network

NE21

FE
NE22
R4 CSH NE24
BTS21 NE6 CSH
ISU2 ISU2 ISU2
EM6T SP3S NE6
ISU2 ISU2
EM6T
E1
FE R4
BTS22
BTS24

NE23
CSH
NE6
ISU2 ISU2
EM6T

FE
R4
BTS23

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 16


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

5 Configuring the Network Topology

About This Chapter

You can manage a transport network by using the U2000 only after configuring the network
topology on the network.

5.1 Basic Concepts


Before configuring the network topology, you need to be familiar with the basic concepts.

5.2 Configuration Procedure


This section describes the procedures for configuring the four topological objects, namely, NEs,
boards, fibers/cables, and subnets.

5.3 Configuration Example (TDM Radio Chain Network Topology)


This section considers a TDM radio chain network as an example to describe how to configure
the network topology according to the network planning information.

5.4 Configuration Example (TDM Radio Ring Network Topology)


This section considers a TDM radio ring network as an example to describe how to configure
the network topology according to the network planning information.

5.5 Configuration Example (Hybrid Radio Chain Network)


This topic considers a Hybrid radio chain network as an example and describes how to configure
NEs according to the planning information.

5.6 Configuration Example (Hybrid Radio Ring Network)


This topic considers a Hybrid radio ring network as an example and describes how to configure
NEs according to the planning information.

5.7 Configuration Example (Packet Network)


This section considers the NEs on a packet network as examples to describe how to configure
NEs according to the network planning information.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 17


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

5.1 Basic Concepts


Before configuring the network topology, you need to be familiar with the basic concepts.

5.1.1 DCN
To manage and maintain an NE, the U2000 needs to communicate with the NE through the data
communication network (DCN).
On a DCN, the U2000 and all the NEs are considered as nodes on the DCN. The DCN between
the U2000 and all the NEs is considered as the external DCN, and the DCN between the NEs is
considered as the internal DCN. The OptiX RTN 950 supports several DCN solutions, including
HWECC and IP DCN. HWECC is the commonest DCN solution.
HWECC is a DCN solution provided by Huawei. In this solution, the NMS manages NEs using
network management messages that are encapsulated in the HWECC protocol stack.
Figure 5-1 shows how network management messages are transmitted in the HWECC solution.
Network management messages encapsulated in compliance with the HWECC protocol stack
can be transmitted through the following DCN channels:
l DCCs carried by SDH or microwave links
l Integrated IP radio links or Ethernet paths over FE/GE ports
l Ethernet network management ports or NE cascading ports

Figure 5-1 HWECC solution


Message
HWECC
Message DCC
HWECC
ETH
Message
HWECC
DCC

Message
HWECC
DCC

NMS

Message Message
HWECC HWECC
DCC DCC

OptiX radio
OptiX optical transmission equipment
transmission equipment

Radio link Fiber Ethernet link

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 18


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

5.1.2 GNE and Non-GNE


A gateway NE (GNE) refers to an NE whose application layer communicates directly with the
NMS application layer. A non-GNE refers to an NE whose application layer communicates with
the NMS application layer by forwarding data through the GNE application layer.

GNE
Generally, a GNE is connected to the NMS through a local area network (LAN) or wide area
network (WAN). Its application layer can directly communicate with the NMS application layer.
One set of NMS needs to be connected to one or more GNEs.

ECC communication between the GNEs may create an oversized DCN. To prevent this, disable
extended ECC for the GNEs.

Non-GNE
A non-GNE communicates with the GNE through the DCN channels between NEs.

5.1.3 NE ID and NE IP Address


The ID and IP address are the unique NE on the DCN.

NE ID
At the application layer of each DCN solution, an OptiX NE uses its NE ID as the NE address.
Therefore, each NE must have a unique NE ID on the DCN and all these NE IDs must be planned
in a unified manner.

The NE ID has 24 bits. The most significant eight bits represent the subnet ID (or the extended
ID) and the least significant 16 bits represent the basic ID. For example, if an NE ID is 0x090001,
the subnet ID is 9 and the basic ID is 1.

NE IP Address
An NE uses an IP address as its unique identifier during TCP/IP communication.

In the HWECC solution, the IP addresses of the NEs on the DCN are used in the following
scenarios:

l A gateway NE (GNE) communicates with the U2000 over TCP/IP. The IP address of the
GNE must be planned as required by the external DCN.
l Different NEs communicate with each other over extended ECC channels. In this scenario,
NE IP addresses must be on the same network segment. By default, NE IP addresses are
on the 129.9.0.0 network segment.

In the DCN solution (for example, IP DCN) where network management messages are
transmitted over TCP/IP, an NE IP address is used as the NE address at the network layer.
Therefore, each NE IP address on the DCN must be unique and all these NE IP addresses must
be planned in a unified manner.

By default (which indicates that an NE IP address is never manually changed), this NE IP address
is automatically changed to 0x81000000 + ID if the NE ID is changed. For example, if an NE

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 19


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

IP address is never manually changed, this NE IP address is automatically changed to 129.9.0.1


when the NE ID is changed to 0x090001. Once an NE IP address is manually changed, the
interlocking relationship between the NE ID and NE IP address no longer takes effect.

It is recommended to configure the IP address of a GNE on a different network segment from


the IP addresses of its non-GNEs.

5.1.4 Physical Boards and Logical Boards


The NE software and NMS consider a physical board as one or more logical boards when
managing the physical board.

Table 5-1 provides the mappings between the physical boards and logical boards.

Table 5-1 Mappings between the physical boards and logical boards

Physical Board Logical Board

CST CST in the same slot

CSH CSH in the same slot

AUX AUX in the same slot

IF1 IF1 in the same slot

IFU2 IFU2 in the same slot

IFX2 IFX2 in the same slot

ISU2 ISU2 in the same slot

ISX2 ISX2 in the same slot

SL1D SL1D in the same slot

SL1DA SL1DA in the same slot

EM6T EM6T in the same slot

EM6TA EM6TA in the same slot

EM6F EM6F in the same slot

EM6FA EM6FA in the same slot

EFP8 EFP8 in the same slot

EMS6 EMS6 in the same slot

SP3S SP3S in the same slot

SP3D SP3D in the same slot

ML1 ML1 in the same slot

MD1 MD1 in the same slot

PIU PIU in the same slot

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 20


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

Physical Board Logical Board

FAN FAN in the same slot

ODU ODU in the slot whose number is 20 plus the


slot number for the IF board that is connected
to the ODU

5.1.5 Fiber/Cable Types


You can obtain the clear fiber/cable connection relations between NEs by using the fiber
management function of the U2000. You can manage the fibers and cables by using the
U2000, including SDH fibers, radio links, Ethernet fibers/cables, extended ECC cables, and
back-to-back radio connections.

l SDH fibers
SDH fibers refer to the fiber connections between different sets of equipment. That is, SDH
fibers indicate the connection relations between different SDH optical ports.
l Radio links
Radio links refer to the radio connections between different sets of radio equipment. That
is, the radio links indicate the connection relations between different IF ports.
l Ethernet fibers/cables
Ethernet fibers/cables refer to the Ethernet fiber/cable connections between different sets
of equipment. that is, the Ethernet fibers/cables indicate the connection relationship
between different Ethernet ports.
l Extended ECC cables
Extended ECC cables refer to the extended ECC channels between the NEs. That is, the
extended ECC cables indicate the connection relations between the NEs.
l Back-to-back radio connections
Back-to-back radio connections refer to the NE cascading relations. That is, the back-to-
back radio connections indicate the connection relations between the NEs.
NOTE

Fibers and cables are topological objects on the U2000. Hence, operations on the fibers or cables do not affect
the normal running of the NEs.

5.1.6 Subnet
NEs in a same domain or with similar attributes can be allocated to a same subnet. In this way,
they can be displayed as a whole on the U2000, thus facilitating the NE management.

The subnets are topological objects on the U2000. Hence, operations on the subnets do not affect
the normal running of the NEs. In the case of a large number of topological objects, subnets that
contain multiple NEs simplify the topology view on the U2000.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 21


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

5.2 Configuration Procedure


This section describes the procedures for configuring the four topological objects, namely, NEs,
boards, fibers/cables, and subnets.

Figure 5-2 provides the procedure for configuring the network topology.

Figure 5-2 Configuration flow chart (network topology)

Start

Creating NEs

Configuring NE attributes

Configuring DCCs

Synchronizing NE time

Setting the performance


monitoring status

Creating fibers/cables and


subnets

End

Required

Optional

The procedure in the configuration flow chart is described as follows.

NOTE

l If the NE ID and NE name are changed in the NE commissioning process and if the NE communication
parameters, logical boards, VLAN ID and bandwidth of the inband DCN are set during the NE
commissioning, the configuration data is automatically synchronized onto the U2000 in the NE data
uploading process. Hence, you do not need to perform the corresponding operations in the initial
configuration process.
l The DCN configuration procedure provided in Figure 5-2 is only a typical HWECC solution configuration.
For the configuration procedure for an HWECC solution containing special requirements or another DCN
solution, see related descriptions in the Feature Description.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 22


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

Table 5-2 Procedure for creating NEs

Step Operation Description

1 Creating NEs A.2.1.2 Creating It is recommended that you perform this


on the U2000 NEs by Using operation to add one or more NEs to a large
the Manual existing network on the U2000.
Method To achieve SSL communication between the
NMS and the gateway NE, Connection
Mode needs to be set to Security SSL.

A.2.1.1 Creating It is recommended that you perform this


NEs by Using operation to create NEs on the U2000 in other
the Search cases. The following parameters need to be
Method set:
l Set Search Mode to Search for NE.
l Search Domain: When the IP address of
the GNE is known, it is recommended that
you set the IP address range of the GNE
as the search domain. In the case of initial
configuration, it is recommended that you
set the 129.9.255.255 network segment as
the search domain.
l Search for NE: It is recommended that
you select Create NE after search, and
Upload after create. By default, NE
User is root and Password is password.
l Connection Mode: This parameter
specifies the connection mode between
the NMS and the gateway NE. For SSL
connection, set this parameter to Security
SSL.

2 A.2.2.1 Uploading the NE Data If you select Upload after create during A.
2.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search
Method, skip this operation.

Table 5-3 Procedure for configuring NE attributes

Step Operation Description

1 A.2.1.5 Required. Set the parameters as follows:


Changing l Change New ID to be the NE ID specified during the
the NE ID planning of the DCN.
l If the extended NE ID is required, change New Extended
ID.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 23


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

Step Operation Description

2 A.2.1.6 Optional.
Changing
the NE
Name

3 A.2.1.3 Required.
Configuring
the Logical
Board

Table 5-4 Procedure for configuring DCCs

Step Operation Description

1 A.2.7.1 Required. Set the parameters as follows:


Setting NE l In the case of the GNE, set IP Address and Subnet
Communica Mask according to the planning of the external DCN.
tion
Parameters l In the case of the GNE, set if the external DCN requires.
l Generally, it is recommended that you set Connection
Mode to Common + Security SSL. If you need to set the
gateway NE to allow for NMS access only in SSL
connection mode, set Connection Mode to Security
SSL.
l In the case of non-GNEs, it is recommended that you set
IP Address to 0x81000000 + NE ID. That is, if the NE ID
is 0x090001, set IP Address to 129.9.0.1. Set Subnet
Mask to 255.255.0.0.
NOTE
If the IP address of an NE is not changed manually, the IP address
changes according to the NE ID and is always 0x81000000 + NE ID.
In this case, the IP address of a non-GNE does not need to be changed
manually.

2 A.2.7.2 If the OptiX RTN 950 needs to interconnect with third-party


Configuring equipment or use inband DCN channels provided by the
DCCs Integrated IP radio.

3 A.2.7.8 For a gateway NE, disable the automatic extended ECC


Configuring function.
Extended
ECC
Communica
tion

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 24


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

Step Operation Description

4 A.2.7.4 Perform this operation if the OptiX RTN equipment uses the
Configuring inband DCN solution and if the VLAN ID and bandwidth
the VLAN planned for this inband DCN do not assume their default
ID and values (the default VLAN ID is 4094 and the default
Bandwidth bandwidth is 512 kbit/s).
Used by an
Inband
DCN

5 Configuring Required. If inband DCN channels use the HWECC protocol,


the Protocol set Protocol Type to HWECC. If inband DCN channels use
Type of the the IP protocol, set Protocol Type to IP.
Inband DCN

6 A.2.7.6 Required in the case of the Integrated IP radio network. Set


Setting the parameters as follows:
Parameters l In the case of the Ethernet ports and microwave ports that
of Inband interconnect with the packet switching equipment, set
DCN Enabled Status to Enabled.
l In the case of the other ports, set Enabled Status to
Disabled.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 25


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

Table 5-5 Procedure for synchronizing NE time

Step Operation Description

1 Synchroni A.2.1.7 Required.


zing the Synchron l To synchronize the NEs with the NM server, set
NE time izing the the relevant parameters as follows:
NE Time
Set Synchronous Mode to NM.
Right-click and choose the operation from the
shortcut menu to ensure that the NE are
synchronized with the NM time immediately.
Set the synchronization parameters according
to the requirements. It is recommended that
the parameters adopt the default values.
l To synchronize the NEs with the NTP server, set
the relevant parameters as follows:
Set Synchronous Mode to Standard NTP.
Set Standard NTP Authentication
according to the requirements for the NTP
server.
It is recommended that you set the upper level
NTP server that the NEs trace as follows:
In the case of the GNE, set the external
NTP server to the upper level NTP server.
Set Standard NTP Server Identifier to
IP and set Standard NTP Server to the
IP address of the external NTP server.
In the case of a non-GNE, set the GNE to
the upper level NTP server. If the non-
GNE needs to communicate with the GNE
through the HWECC protocol, set
Standard NTP Server Identifier to NE
ID and set Standard NTP Server to the
NE ID of the GNE. If the non-GNE needs
to communicate with the GNE through the
IP protocol, set Standard NTP Server
Identifier to IP and set Standard NTP
Server to the IP address of the GNE.
Set Standard NTP Server Key according
to the requirements for the NTP server.

A.2.1.8 Required if the DST scheme is used at the local area.


Localizin Set the parameters according to the planning of the
g the NE DST at the local area.
Time

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 26


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

Step Operation Description

A.2.1.9 Required if the standard NTP authentication is used


Configuri to synchronize the NEs with the NTP server.
ng Set the parameters according to the identification
Standard authentication of the NTP.
NTP Keys

Table 5-6 Procedure for setting the performance monitoring status

Step Operation Description

1 A.2.3 If the 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitoring


Configuring functions are set to Disabled, enable these performance
the monitoring functions.
Performanc
e
Monitoring
Status of
NEs

Table 5-7 Procedure for creating fibers/cables and subnets

Step Operation Description

1 Creating A.2.5.1 It is recommended that you perform this operation


fibers/ Creating to create radio links or SDH fibers on the U2000
cables Optical when the physical radio links or SDH fibers exist.
Fibers by
Using the
Search
Method

A.2.5.2 You need to perform this operation to create the


Creating fibers and cables (such as Ethernet links and E1
Fibers cables) that cannot be searched for.
Manually

2 A.2.5.3 Creating an Optional when NEs are connected through extended


Extended ECC ECC channels.

3 A.2.5.4 Creating a Optional when there are cascading NEs on the


Back-to-Back Radio network.
Connection

4 Configuri A.2.6.1 Optional.


ng the Creating
subnet a Subnet

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 27


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

Step Operation Description

A.2.6.2 Optional.
Copying
Topology
Objects

A.2.6.3 Optional.
Moving
Topology
Objects

5.3 Configuration Example (TDM Radio Chain Network


Topology)
This section considers a TDM radio chain network as an example to describe how to configure
the network topology according to the network planning information.

5.3.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking information about the NEs.

Figure 5-3 shows a TDM radio chain network configured according to the following
requirements.

l The TDM radio chain network is comprised of the OptiX RTN equipment managed by the
standalone U2000.
l The U2000 is connected to NE11 with a network cable. Therefore, NE11 serves as a GNE
and the other NEs are non-GNEs with an access to the U2000 through NE11.
l NE12 and NE13 are interconnected by using fibers.
l The TDM radio chain network is interconnected with a third-party SDH network by using
fibers. Therefore, the base station backhaul services converged from the TDM radio chain
network are transmitted over the third-party SDH network.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 28


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

Figure 5-3 Networking diagram (TDM radio chain network)


NMS

E1
BTS12 DCN

STM-1
E1 Third party
NE14
SDH network
BTS13
E1 STM-1
NE13 NE12 NE11

E1 BTS11
E1
NE16 NE15

BTS15 BTS14

The connections of DCN links shown in Figure 5-3 are described as follows.

Table 5-8 Connections of DCN links (NE11)

Link Port Description

Link between NE11 and the 1-SL1D-1 (working unit) l Configure the ports as a 1
third-party SDH network +1 linear MSP group.
1-SL1D-2 (protection unit)
l The base station backhaul
services converged from
the TDM radio chain
network are transmitted
over the third-party SDH
network to the BSC.

5.3.2 Service Planning


The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for
configuring the NE data.

l In this example, the network is comprised of OptiX RTN equipment only, and therefore
HWECC is preferred as the DCN solution. In the HWECC solution, NE12 and NE13
communicate with each other through DCC channels in the SDH optical fibers and the
other NEs communicate with each other through the DCC channels over microwave. If no
fiber connections are set up between NE12 and NE13, NE12 and NE13 communicate with
each other through the extended ECC that is enabled by default.
l NE11 is the GNE. Hence, the extended ECC function of NE11 needs to be disabled.
l The TDM radio chain network is connected to the third-party network through STM-1
optical fibers. The TDM radio chain and the third-party network are managed by the

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 29


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

U2000. Therefore, the DCC channel needs to be disabled over the port on the N11 for
connecting to the third-party network.
l Figure 5-4 shows the ID and IP address that are allocated to each NE according to the
uniform DCN planning information.

Figure 5-4 Allocated IDs and IP addresses (TDM radio chain network)

NMS

9-14 10.0.0.100/16
129.9.0.14
0.0.0.0
NE14 9-13 9-12 9-11
129.9.0.13 129.9.0.12 10.0.0.11 Third party
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 SDH network
NE13 NE12 NE11
9-15
9-16 129.9.0.15
129.9.0.16 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
NE15 Extended ID-Basic ID
NE16 IP address
Gateway

NOTE

l The subnet mask for the IP address of each NE is 255.255.0.0.


l The IP addresses of all the NEs, except NE11, are in the interlocking relations with the NE IDs. Hence,
if the IP address of an NE (not NE11) is not changed manually, the NE automatically changes the IP
address to be the planned value after the NE ID is changed.
l In this example, the policy of synchronizing the NE with the NM server is used. The
automatic synchronization period is one day. The daylight saving time (DST) scheme is
not used at the local area.
l The 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitoring functions are enabled.
l In this configuration example, no subnets need to be configured.

5.3.3 Configuration Process


This section describes the procedures for the data configuration.

Precautions
If the NE ID and the values of NE communication parameters are changed and the logical boards
are configured in the NE commissioning process, skip the operations.

Procedure
Step 1 See A.2.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method and create the NEs.

The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 30


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

Parameter Value

Search Domain IP Address 129.9.255.255

Search User root

Search for NE Create NE after search Selected

Upload after create Selected

NE User root

Password password

NOTE

In this configuration example, it is assumed that the IP address of the GNE is not changed manually and is not
known. Hence, you need to search for and create the NEs by using the 129.9.255.255 network segment as the
search domain. If the IP address of the GNE is known, it is recommended that you use the IP address of the
GNE as the search domain.
The icons of NE11 to NE16 should be displayed on the Main Topology and all the NE data
should be uploaded successfully.

Step 2 See A.2.1.5 Changing the NE ID and change the NE ID.

The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.

Paramete Value
r
NE11 NE12 NE13 NE14 NE15 NE16

New ID 11 12 13 14 15 16

New 9 (default 9 (default 9 (default 9 (default 9 (default 9 (default


Extended value) value) value) value) value) value)
ID

Step 3 See A.2.1.3 Configuring the Logical Board and configure the logical boards.

Configure the logical boards according to the mapping relations between the physical boards
and logical boards.

Step 4 See A.2.7.1 Setting NE Communication Parameters and set the NE communication
parameters.

The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE11

IP Address 10.0.0.11

Gateway IP Address 0.0.0.0 (default value)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 31


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

Parameter Value

NE11

Subnet Mask 255.255.0.0 (default value)

Extended ID 9

Connection Mode Common + Security SSL

NOTE

The IP addresses of all the NEs, except NE11, are in the interlocking relations with the NE IDs. Hence, you
need not change the values of the NE communication parameters manually.

Step 5 See A.2.7.2 Configuring DCCs and configure the DCCs.


The values for the relevant parameters of NE11 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

1-SL1D-1 1-SL1D-2

Enabled/Disabled Disabled Disabled

Step 6 See A.2.7.8 Configuring Extended ECC Communication and disable the automatic extended
ECC function for the gateway NE (NE11).
Step 7 See A.2.1.7 Synchronizing the NE Time and synchronize the NE time.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

All the Ports on All the NEs

Synchronous Mode NM

Synchronization Period(days) 1

Step 8 See A.2.5.1 Creating Optical Fibers by Using the Search Method and create radio links or
SDH fiber connections.
Normally, all the radio links or SDH fiber connections should be created successfully on the
Main Topology.
Step 9 See A.2.5.4 Creating a Back-to-Back Radio Connection and create back-to-back radio
connections.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

Source NE NE12

Sink NE NE13

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 32


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

----End

5.4 Configuration Example (TDM Radio Ring Network


Topology)
This section considers a TDM radio ring network as an example to describe how to configure
the network topology according to the network planning information.

5.4.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking information about the NEs.
Figure 5-5 shows a TDM radio ring topology configured according to the following
requirements.
l The TDM radio ring network is comprised of the OptiX RTN equipment managed by the
standalone U2000.
l The U2000 is connected to NE21 with a network cable. Therefore, NE21 serves as a GNE
and the other NEs are non-GNEs with an access to the U2000 through NE21.
l The TDM radio ring network is interconnected with a third-party SDH network by using
E1 cables. Therefore, the base station backhaul services converged from the TDM radio
ring network are transmitted over the third-party SDH network.

Figure 5-5 Networking diagram (TDM radio ring network)

NMS
DCN

Third party E1
SDH network NE21

BTS21

NE22 NE24 BTS24

BTS22

NE23

BTS23

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 33


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

The connections of DCN links shown in Figure 5-5 are described as follows.

Table 5-9 Connections of DCN links (NE21)

Link Port Description

Link between NE21 and the 2-SP3S The base station backhaul
third-party SDH network services converged from the
TDM radio ring network are
transmitted over the third-
party SDH network to the
BSC.

5.4.2 Service Planning


The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for
configuring the NE data.

l In this example, the network is comprised of OptiX RTN equipment only, and therefore
HWECC is preferred as the DCN solution. In the HWECC solution, the NEs communicate
with each other through the DCC channels over microwave.
l NE21 is the GNE. Hence, the extended ECC function of NE21 should be disabled.
l The TDM radio ring network is connected to the third-party network through E1 cables
and cannot communicate with the third-party network. Therefore, the DCC channels need
to be disabled on NE21.
l Figure 5-6 shows the ID and IP address that are allocated to each NE according to the
uniform DCN planning information.

Figure 5-6 Allocated IDs and IP addresses (TDM radio ring network)

Third part
SDH network E1 10.0.0.101/16
9-21
10.0.0.21
0.0.0.0
NE21 9-24
9-22
129.9.0.22 129.9.0.24
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

NE22 9-23
NE24
129.9.0.23
0.0.0.0
Extended ID-Basic ID
NE23 IP address
Gateway

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 34


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

NOTE

l The subnet mask for the IP address of each NE is 255.255.0.0.


l The IP addresses of all the NEs, except NE21, are in the interlocking relations with the NE IDs. Hence,
if the IP address of an NE (not NE21) is not changed manually, the NE automatically changes the IP
address to be the planned value after the NE ID is changed.
l In this example, the policy of synchronizing the NE with the NM server is used. The
automatic synchronization period is one day. The daylight saving time (DST) scheme is
not used at the local area.
l The 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitoring functions are enabled.
l In this configuration example, no subnets need to be configured.

5.4.3 Configuration Process


This section describes the procedures for the data configuration.

Precautions
If the NE ID and the values of NE communication parameters are changed and the logical boards
are configured in the NE commissioning process, skip the operations.

Procedure
Step 1 See A.2.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method and create the NEs.

The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

Search Domain IP Address 129.9.255.255

Search User root

Search for NE Create NE after search Selected

Upload after create Selected

NE User root

Password password

NOTE

In this configuration example, it is assumed that the IP address of the GNE is not changed manually and the IP
addresses of the non-GNEs are not known. Hence, you need to search for and create the NEs by using the
129.9.255.255 network segment as the search domain. If the IP address of the GNE is known, it is recommended
that you use the IP address of the GNE as the search domain.
The icons of NE21 to NE24 should be displayed on the Main Topology and all the NE data
should be uploaded successfully.

Step 2 See A.2.1.5 Changing the NE ID and change the NE ID.

The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 35


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

Parameter Value

NE21 NE22 NE23 NE24

New ID 21 22 23 24

New Extended 9 (default value) 9 (default value) 9 (default value) 9 (default value)
ID

Step 3 See A.2.1.3 Configuring the Logical Board and configure logical boards.

Configure the logical boards according to the mapping relations between the physical boards
and logical boards.

Step 4 See A.2.7.1 Setting NE Communication Parameters and set the NE communication
parameters.

The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE21

IP Address 10.0.0.21

Gateway IP Address 0.0.0.0 (default value)

Subnet Mask 255.255.0.0 (default value)

Extended ID 9

Connection Mode Common + Security SSL

NOTE

The IP addresses of all the NEs, except NE21, are in the interlocking relations with the NE IDs. Hence, you
need not change the values of the NE communication parameters manually.

Step 5 See A.2.7.8 Configuring Extended ECC Communication and disable the automatic extended
ECC function for the gateway NE (NE21).

Step 6 See A.2.1.7 Synchronizing the NE Time and synchronize the NE time.

The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

All the Ports on All the NEs

Synchronous Mode NM

Synchronization Period(days) 1

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 36


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

Step 7 See A.2.5.1 Creating Optical Fibers by Using the Search Method and create radio links or
SDH fiber connections.
Normally, all the radio links or SDH fiber connections should be created successfully on the
Main Topology.

----End

5.5 Configuration Example (Hybrid Radio Chain Network)


This topic considers a Hybrid radio chain network as an example and describes how to configure
NEs according to the planning information.

5.5.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking information about the NEs.

Figure 5-7 shows a Hybrid radio chain network configured according to the following
requirements.

l The Hybrid radio chain network is comprised of the OptiX RTN equipment managed by
the U2000 connected to the packet network.
l All NEs on the Hybrid radio chain network are non-GNEs with an access to the U2000
through the packet network.
l The Hybrid radio chain network receives various base station services and transmits them
to the packet network through NE11.
l NE12 and NE13 are interconnected through cascading ports.
NOTE

For details on configuration of NE11, see 5.7 Configuration Example (Packet Network).

Figure 5-7 Networking diagram (Hybrid radio chain network)

R4 FE
BTS12
E1+GE+
NE cascade
E1 NE14
R99 Packet network
BTS13 FE
NE13 NE12 NE11

R4
E1 BTS11
FE NE15
NE16
R99
R4
BTS14
BTS15

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 37


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

5.5.2 Service Planning


The service planning information contains all the parameters required for configuring the NE
data.

l All NEs except NE11 adopt HWECC for DCN communication. To be specific, NE12 and
NE13 are interconnected through cascading ports and adopt automatic extended ECC
(enabled by default) for DCN communication; the other NEs use DCC channels in radio
signals for DCN communication.
l NEs numbered 12 to 16 are not connected to the packet network. Therefore, to improve
bandwidth utilization, the inband DCN function is disabled at all ports of these NEs.
l Figure 5-8 shows the ID and IP address that are allocated to each NE according to the
uniform DCN planning information.

Figure 5-8 Allocated IDs and IP addresses (Hybrid radio chain network)
9-14
129.9.0.14
0.0.0.0
NE14 9-13 9-12
129.9.0.13 129.9.0.12
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Packet
network
NE13 NE12
9-15 NE11
9-16 129.9.0.15
129.9.0.16 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
NE15 Extended ID-Basic ID
NE16 IP address
Gateway

NOTE

l The subnet mask for the IP address of each NE is 255.255.0.0.


l The IP addresses of all the NEs are in the interlocking relations with the NE IDs. Hence, if the IP
address of an NE is not changed manually, the NE automatically changes the IP address to be the
planned value after the NE ID is changed.
l In this example, the policy of synchronizing the NE with the NM server is used. The
automatic synchronization period is one day. The daylight saving time (DST) scheme is
not used in the local area.
l The 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitoring functions are enabled.
l In this configuration example, no subnets need to be configured.

5.5.3 Configuration Process


This section describes the process for the data configuration.

Precautions
If the NE ID and the values of NE communication parameters are changed and the logical boards
are configured in the NE commissioning process, skip the operations.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 38


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

Procedure
Step 1 See A.2.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method and create the NEs.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

Search Domain IP Address 129.9.255.255

Search User root

Search for NE Create NE after search Selected

Upload after create Selected

NE User root

Password password

NOTE

In this configuration example, it is assumed that the IP address of the GNE has not been changed manually and
that the IP addresses of the non-GNEs are not known. Hence, you need to search for and create the NEs by using
the 129.9.255.255 network segment as the search domain. If the IP address of the GNE is known, it is
recommended that you use the IP address of the GNE as the search domain.
The icons of NE12 to NE16 should be displayed on the Main Topology and all the NE data
should be uploaded successfully.
Step 2 See A.2.1.5 Changing the NE ID and change the NE ID.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE12 NE13 NE14 NE15 NE16

New ID 12 13 14 15 16

New 9 (default 9 (default 9 (default 9 (default 9 (default


Extended value) value) value) value) value)
ID

Step 3 See A.2.1.3 Configuring the Logical Board and configure logical boards.
Configure the logical boards according to the mapping relationships between the physical boards
and logical boards.
Step 4 See A.2.7.6 Setting Parameters of Inband DCN and enable/disable the inband DCN at the
ports.
The values for the related parameters of NE12 to NE16 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

All Ports

Enabled Status Disabled

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 39


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

Step 5 See A.2.1.7 Synchronizing the NE Time and synchronize the NE time.

The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

All the Ports on All the NEs

Synchronous Mode NM

Synchronization Period(days) 1

Step 6 See A.2.5.1 Creating Optical Fibers by Using the Search Method and create radio links or
SDH fiber connections.
Normally, all the radio links or SDH fiber connections should be created successfully on the
Main Topology.

Step 7 See A.2.5.4 Creating a Back-to-Back Radio Connection and create back-to-back connections.

The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

Source NE NE12

Sink NE NE13

----End

5.6 Configuration Example (Hybrid Radio Ring Network)


This topic considers a Hybrid radio ring network as an example and describes how to configure
NEs according to the planning information.

5.6.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking information about the NEs.

Figure 5-9 shows a Hybrid radio ring network configured according to the following
requirements.

l The Hybrid radio ring network is comprised of the OptiX RTN equipment managed by the
U2000 connected to the packet network.
l All NEs on the Hybrid radio ring network are non-GNEs with an access to the U2000
through the packet network.
l The Hybrid radio ring network receives various base station services and transmits them
to the packet network through NE21.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 40


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

NOTE

For details on configuration of NE21, see 5.7 Configuration Example (Packet Network).

Figure 5-9 Networking diagram (Hybrid radio ring network)

Packet network

NE21

R4 FE
BTS21 FE
R4
E1 NE22 NE24 BTS24

BTS22

FE
NE23
R4
BTS23

5.6.2 Service Planning


The service planning information contains all the parameters required for configuring the NE
data.

l All NEs except NE21 adopt HWECC for DCN communication. In HWECC mode, NEs
use DCC channels in radio signals for DCN communication.
l NEs numbered 22 to 24 are not connected to the packet network. Therefore, to improve
bandwidth utilization, the inband DCN function is disabled at all ports of these NEs.
l Figure 5-10 shows the ID and IP address that are allocated to each NE according to the
uniform DCN planning information.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 41


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

Figure 5-10 Allocated IDs and IP addresses (Hybrid radio ring network)

Packet network

NE21 9-24
9-22
129.9.0.22 129.9.0.24
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

NE22 9-23 NE24


129.9.0.23
0.0.0.0
Extended ID-Basic ID
NE23 IP address
Gateway

NOTE

l The subnet mask for the IP address of each NE is 255.255.0.0.


l The IP addresses of all the NEs are in the interlocking relations with the NE IDs. Hence, if the IP
address of an NE is not changed manually, the NE automatically changes the IP address to be the
planned value after the NE ID is changed.
l In this example, the policy of synchronizing the NE with the NM server is used. The
automatic synchronization period is one day. The daylight saving time (DST) scheme is
not used in the local area.
l The 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitoring functions are enabled.
l In this configuration example, no subnets need to be configured.

5.6.3 Configuration Process


This section describes the process for the data configuration.

Precautions
If the NE ID and the values of NE communication parameters are changed and the logical boards
are configured in the NE commissioning process, skip the operations.

Procedure
Step 1 See A.2.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method and create the NEs.

The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

Search Domain IP Address 129.9.255.255

Search User root

Search for NE Create NE after search Selected

Upload after create Selected

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 42


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

Parameter Value

NE User root

Password password

NOTE

In this configuration example, it is assumed that the IP address of the GNE has not been changed manually and
that the IP addresses of the non-GNEs are not known. Hence, you need to search for and create the NEs by using
the 129.9.255.255 network segment as the search domain. If the IP address of the GNE is known, it is
recommended that you use the IP address of the GNE as the search domain.
The icons of NE22 to NE24 should be displayed on the Main Topology and all the NE data
should be uploaded successfully.

Step 2 See A.2.1.5 Changing the NE ID and change the NE ID.

The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE22 NE23 NE24

New ID 22 23 24

New Extended ID 9 (default value) 9 (default value) 9 (default value)

Step 3 See A.2.1.3 Configuring the Logical Board and configure logical boards.

Configure the logical boards according to the mapping relationships between the physical boards
and logical boards.

Step 4 See A.2.7.6 Setting Parameters of Inband DCN.

The values for the related parameters of NE22 to NE24 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

All Ports

Enabled Status Disabled

Step 5 See A.2.1.7 Synchronizing the NE Time and synchronize the NE time.

The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

All the Ports on All the NEs

Synchronous Mode NM

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 43


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

Parameter Value

All the Ports on All the NEs

Synchronization Period(days) 1

Step 6 See A.2.5.1 Creating Optical Fibers by Using the Search Method and create radio links or
SDH fiber connections.
Normally, all the radio links or SDH fiber connections should be created successfully on the
Main Topology.

----End

5.7 Configuration Example (Packet Network)


This section considers the NEs on a packet network as examples to describe how to configure
NEs according to the network planning information.

5.7.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking information about the NEs.

Figure 5-11 shows a packet network configured according to the following requirements.

l The packet network receives various base station services and the base station backhaul
services converged from a Hybrid radio chain network and a Hybrid radio ring network.
l The packet network is comprised of the OptiX RTN equipment managed by the U2000.
NOTE

NE31 is an OptiX PTN NE in an actual network because it does not support any radio links. In this
example, NE31 is an IDU.
l The U2000 is connected to NE31 by using a network cable. Therefore, NE31 serves as a
GNE and the other NEs are non-GNEs with an access to the U2000 through NE31.
l The NEs on the packet ring are interconnected through GE fiber links. The NEs on the
packet chain are interconnected through Packet radio links.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 44


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

Figure 5-11 Networking diagram (packet network)


NE34
BTS33 NE33

FE
BTS31
R4
BTS32
E1 E1 R4
FE
R99
BTS34 GE GE
NE32
Hybrid radio chain
NE11 NE31 NMS
network
E1
GE
NE21 GE
E1

E1
E1

+G
BSC

E
BTS36 BTS35 Hybrid radio ring
network R99 R99
BTS37 BTS38

RNC

The connections of DCN links shown in Figure 5-11 are described as follows.

Table 5-10 Connections of DCN links (NE31)

Link Port Description

Between NE31 and NE21 1-EM6F-2 Transmits services on the


packet ring.
Between NE31 and NE32 1-EM6F-1

Table 5-11 Connections of DCN links (NE32)

Link Port Description

Between NE32 and NE31 2-EM6F-2 Transmits services on the


packet ring.
Between NE32 and NE11 2-EM6F-1

Between NE32 and NE33 3-ISU2-1 (main IF board of a Transmits services on the
1+1 HSB protection group) packet chain.

5-ISU2-1 (standby IF board


of a 1+1 HSB protection
group)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 45


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

Table 5-12 Connections of DCN links (NE33)

Link Port Description

Between NE33 and NE32 4-ISU2-1 (main IF board of a Transmits services on the
1+1 HSB protection group) packet chain.

6-ISU2-1 (standby IF board


of a 1+1 HSB protection
group)

Between NE33 and NE34 3-ISU2-1

Table 5-13 Connections of DCN links (NE34)

Link Port Description

Between NE34 and NE33 3-ISU2-1 Transmits services on the


packet chain.

Table 5-14 Connections of DCN links (NE11)

Link Port Description

Between NE11 and NE32 2-EM6F-2 Transmits services on the


packet ring.
Between NE11 and NE21 2-EM6F-1

Table 5-15 Connections of DCN links (NE21)

Link Port Description

Between NE21 and NE11 1-EM6F-2 Transmits services on the


packet ring.
Between NE21 and NE31 1-EM6F-1

5.7.2 Service Planning


The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for
configuring the NE data.

l Service channels are used for communication because NEs on the packet ring are
interconnected through GE fiber links. For the convenience of maintenance, inband DCN
is adopted on the packet ring and the packet chain.
l Plan the channel for inband DCN.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 46


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

On the packet ring, the inband DCN function needs to be enabled at Ethernet ports of
all NEs and be disabled at other ports.
On the packet chain, the inband DCN function needs to be enabled at microwave ports
of all NEs and be disabled at other ports.
l Plan the management VLAN ID and bandwidth of inband DCN for each NE.
The management VLAN ID takes the default value 4094.
If the number of NEs is not greater than 50, set the bandwidth of the inband DCN to
512 kbit/s (default value).
l To facilitate interconnection with equipment that does not support HWECC, plane inband
DCN channels to use the default IP protocol.
l The extended ECC function needs to be disabled on the GNE, namely, NE31.
l Figure 5-12 shows the ID and IP address that are allocated to each NE according to the
uniform DCN planning information.

Figure 5-12 Allocated IDs and IP addresses (packet network)


9-34 9-33 Packet
129.9.0.34 129.9.0.33 radio link
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
NE34 NE33
9-32
GE 129.9.0.32
GE
0.0.0.0
NE32
Hybrid Radio NMS
9-11 9-31
Network 10.0.0.31
129.9.0.11
0.0.0.0 NE11 0.0.0.0

NE11 NE31
9-21
GE
10.0.0.103/16
GE 129.9.0.21
0.0.0.0
NE21

Hybrid Radio
Network

Extended ID-Basic ID
IP address
Gateway

NOTE

l The subnet mask for the IP address of each NE is 255.255.0.0.


l The IP addresses of all the NEs, except NE31, are in the interlocking relationships with the NE IDs.
Hence, if the IP address of an NE (not NE31) is not changed manually, the NE automatically changes
the IP address to be the planned value after the NE ID is changed.
l In this example, the policy of synchronizing the NE with the NM server is used. The
automatic synchronization period is one day. The daylight saving time (DST) scheme is
not used at the local area.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 47


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

l The 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitoring functions are enabled.


l In this configuration example, no subnets need to be configured.

5.7.3 Configuration Process


This section describes the process for the data configuration.

Precautions
If the NE ID and the values of NE communication parameters are changed and the logical boards
are configured in the NE commissioning process, skip the operations.

Procedure
Step 1 See A.2.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method and create the NEs.

The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

Search Domain IP Address 129.9.255.255

Search User root

Search for NE Create NE after search Selected

Upload after create Selected

NE User root

Password password

NOTE

In this configuration example, it is assumed that the IP address of the GNE has not been changed manually and
that the IP addresses of the non-GNEs are not known. Hence, you need to search for and create the NEs by using
the 129.9.255.255 network segment as the search domain. If the IP address of the GNE is known, it is
recommended that you use the IP address of the GNE as the search domain.
The icons of NE31 to NE34, NE11, and NE21 should be displayed on the Main Topology and
all the NE data should be uploaded successfully.

Step 2 See A.2.1.5 Changing the NE ID and change the NE ID.

The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.

Paramete Value
r
NE31 NE32 NE33 NE34 NE11 NE21

New ID 31 32 33 34 11 21

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 48


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

Paramete Value
r
NE31 NE32 NE33 NE34 NE11 NE21

New 9 (default 9 (default 9 (default 9 (default 9 (default 9 (default


Extended value) value) value) value) value) value)
ID

Step 3 See A.2.1.3 Configuring the Logical Board and configure logical boards.

Configure the logical boards according to the mapping relationships between the physical boards
and logical boards.

Step 4 See A.2.7.1 Setting NE Communication Parameters and set the NE communication
parameters.

The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE31

IP Address 10.0.0.31

Gateway IP Address 0.0.0.0 (default value)

Subnet Mask 255.255.0.0 (default value)

Extended ID 9

Connection Mode Common + Security SSL

NOTE

The IP addresses of all the NEs, except NE31, are in the interlocking relationships with the NE IDs. Hence, you
need not change the values of the NE communication parameters manually.

Step 5 See A.2.7.8 Configuring Extended ECC Communication and disable the automatic extended
ECC function for the gateway NE (NE31).

Step 6 See A.2.7.6 Setting Parameters of Inband DCN and configure the extended ECC.

The values for the related parameters of NE31 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

1-EM6F-1 1-EM6F-2 Other Ports

Enabled Status Enabled Enabled Disabled

The values for the related parameters of NE32 are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 49


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

Parameter Value

2-EM6F-1 2-EM6F-2 3-ISU2-1 5-ISU2-1 Other Ports

Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled


Status

The values for the related parameters of NE33 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-ISU2-1 4-ISU2-1 6-ISU2-1 Other Ports

Enabled Status Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled

The values for the related parameters of NE34 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-ISU2-1 Other Ports

Enabled Status Enabled Disabled

The values for the related parameters of NE11 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

2-EM6F-1 2-EM6F-2 Other Ports

Enabled Status Enabled Enabled Disabled

The values for the related parameters of NE21 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

1-EM6F-1 1-EM6F-2 Other Ports

Enabled Status Enabled Enabled Disabled

Step 7 See A.2.1.7 Synchronizing the NE Time and synchronize the NE time.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

All Ports on All NEs

Synchronous Mode NM

Synchronization Period(days) 1

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 50


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 5 Configuring the Network Topology

Step 8 See A.2.5.1 Creating Optical Fibers by Using the Search Method and create radio links or
SDH fiber connections.
Normally, all the radio links or SDH fiber connections should be created successfully on the
Main Topology.

----End

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 51


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

6 Configuring Radio Links

About This Chapter

Before configuring services on a radio link, you need to configure the radio link.

6.1 Basic Concepts


Before configuring the radio link, you need to be familiar with the basic concepts.

6.2 Configuration Procedure


The configuration procedures of different radio link configuration methods are different.

6.3 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the TDM Radio Chain Network)
This section considers radio links on a TDM radio chain network as examples to describe how
to configure radio links according to the planning information.

6.4 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the TDM Radio Ring Network)
This section considers TDM radio links on a TDM radio ring network as examples to describe
how to configure radio links according to the network planning information.

6.5 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the Hybrid Radio Chain Network)
This section considers radio links on a Hybrid radio chain network as examples to describe how
to configure radio links according to the network planning information.

6.6 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the Hybrid Radio Ring Network)
This section considers radio links on a Hybrid radio ring network as examples to describe how
to configure radio links according to the network planning information.

6.7 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the Packet Network)


This section considers radio links on a packet network as examples to describe how to configure
radio links according to the network plan.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 52


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

6.1 Basic Concepts


Before configuring the radio link, you need to be familiar with the basic concepts.

6.1.1 Adaptive Modulation


The adaptive modulation (AM) technology adjusts the modulation scheme automatically based
on channel quality.

When the AM technology is adopted, in the case of the same channel spacing, the microwave
service bandwidth varies according to the modulation scheme; the higher the modulation
efficiency, the higher the bandwidth of the transmitted services.
l When the channel quality is good (such as on days when weather conditions are favorable),
the equipment adopts a high-efficiency modulation scheme to transmit more user services.
This improves transmission efficiency and spectrum utilization of the system.
l When the channel quality deteriorates (such as on days with adverse weather), the
equipment adopts a low-efficiency modulation scheme to transmit only higher-priority
services within the available bandwidth while discarding lower-priority services. This
method improves anti-interference capabilities of the radio link, which helps ensure the
link availability for higher-priority services.

In Integrated IP radio mode, the equipment supports the AM technology. With configurable
priorities for E1 services and packet services, the transmission is controlled based on the service
bandwidth and QoS policies corresponding to the current modulation scheme. The highest-
priority services are transmitted with precedence.
NOTE

In Integrated IP radio mode, when the equipment transmits STM-1 services and packet services at the same
time, STM-1 services have highest priority and their transmission is ensured.
l Priorities of E1 services
The priorities of E1 services are assigned based on the number of E1 services that each
modulation scheme can transmit. When modulation scheme switching occurs, only the E1
services whose number is specified in the new modulation scheme can be transmitted and
the excess E1 services are discarded.
l Priorities of packet services
With the QoS technology, packet services are scheduled to queues with different priorities.
The services in different queues are transmitted to the microwave port after running the
queue scheduling algorithm. When modulation scheme switching occurs, certain queues
may be congested due to insufficient capacity at the air interface. As a result, certain services
or all the services in these queues are discarded.

Figure 6-1 shows the change in services brought by the AM technology. The orange part
indicates E1 services. The blue part indicates packet services. The closer the service is to the
outside of the cylinder in the figure, the lower the service priority. Under all channel conditions,
the service capacity varies according to the modulation scheme. When the channel conditions
are unfavorable (during adverse weather conditions), lower-priority services are discarded.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 53


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Figure 6-1 Adaptive modulation

256QAM

128QAM

64QAM

32QAM

16QAM

QPSK
16QAM
Channel
Capability 32QAM

64QAM

128QAM
E1 Services
256QAM
Ethernet
Services

The AM technology used by the OptiX RTN 950 has the following characteristics:

l The AM technology uses the QPSK, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, and 256QAM
modulation schemes.
l The lowest-efficiency modulation scheme (also called reference scheme or modulation
scheme of guaranteed capacity) and the highest-efficiency modulation scheme (also called
nominal scheme or modulation scheme of full capacity) used by the AM can be configured.
l In AM, when modulation schemes are switched, the transmit frequency, receive frequency,
and channel spacing remain unchanged.
l In AM, modulation schemes are switched step-by-step.
l In AM, modulation scheme switching is hitless. When the modulation scheme is
downshifted, high-priority services will not be affected when low-priority services are
discarded. The switching is successful even when 100 dB/s channel fast fading occurs.

6.1.2 CCDP and XPIC


The co-channel dual-polarization (CCDP) and cross-polarization interference cancellation
(XPIC) technologies are developed based on microwave polarization characteristics. CCDP,
wherein two signals are transmitted over two orthogonal polarization waves, doubles the
transmission capacity. XPIC cancels the cross-polarization interference between the two
polarization waves.

Microwave transmission can be classified into single-polarized transmission and CCDP


transmission by polarization transmission mode.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 54


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

l In single-polarized transmission, a signal is transmitted over the horizontally polarized


wave or the vertically polarized wave on the same channel, as shown in Figure 6-2.
l In CCDP transmission, two signals are transmitted over the horizontally polarized wave
and the vertically polarized wave on the same channel, as shown in Figure 6-3.

The capacity in CCDP transmission mode is twice the capacity in single-polarized transmission
mode.

Figure 6-2 Single-polarized transmission

Figure 6-3 CCDP transmission

The ideal situation of CCDP transmission is that no interference exists between the two
orthogonal signals that operate at the same frequency, and then the receiver can easily recover
the two signals. In actual engineering conditions, however, regardless of the orthogonality of
the two signals, certain interference between the signals exists, due to cross-polarization
discrimination (XPD) of the antenna and channel deterioration. To cancel the interference, the
XPIC technology is used to receive and process the signals in the horizontal and vertical
directions so that the original signals are recovered.

6.1.3 RF Configuration Modes


The OptiX RTN 950 supports five RF configuration modes, namely, 1+0 non-protection
configuration, N+0 non-protection configuration, 1+1 protection configuration, N+1 protection
configuration, and cross-polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) configuration.

1+0 Non-Protection Configuration


The 1+0 non-protection configuration indicates that the radio link has one working channel and
no protection channel.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 55


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

N+0 Non-Protection Configuration


The N+0 non-protection configuration indicates that the radio link has N working channels and
no protection channel.
The OptiX RTN 950 supports N+0 protection (1 < N 5).

1+1 Protection Configuration


The 1+1 protection configuration indicates that the radio link has one working channel and one
protection channel.
The 1+1 protection configuration is classified into 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD, and 1+1 SD.
l In 1+1 HSB protection mode, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for
the IF boards and ODUs at both ends of each hop of radio link, implementing the protection.
l In 1+1 FD protection mode, the system uses two channels with a specific frequency interval
to transmit and receive the same service signal. The opposite end selects one from the two
received signals. With the 1+1 FD protection, the impact of the fading on signal
transmission is reduced.
The 1+1 FD protection also supports the 1+1 HSB protection.
l In the 1+1 SD protection mode, the system uses two antennas with a space distance to
receive the same RF signal. The equipment selects from the two received signals. With the
1+1 SD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced.
The 1+1 SD protection also supports the 1+1 HSB protection.

N+1 Protection Configuration


The N+1 protection configuration indicates that the radio link has N working channels and one
protection channel.
The OptiX RTN 950 supports N+1 protection only in STM-1 radio and Integrated IP radio. The
N+1 protection is implemented through the N+1 MSP similar to l:N linear MSP.
The OptiX RTN 950 supports N+1 protection (1 N 4).

XPIC Configuration
The XPIC adopts both the horizontally polarized wave and the vertically polarized wave over
one channel to transmit two channels of signals. The radio link capacity in XPIC configuration
is double the radio link capacity in 1+0 configuration.
The OptiX RTN 950 only supports the XPIC configuration for Integrated IP radio.

6.1.4 PLA
Physical link aggregation (PLA) aggregates all Ethernet bandwidths in several Integrated IP
radio links between two NEs into a logical Ethernet path for higher Ethernet bandwidth. Using
PLA can effectively improve the bandwidth and reliability for transmitting Ethernet services
over Integrated IP radio links.
As shown in Figure 6-4, PLA allows all Ethernet transmission paths in several Integrated IP
radio links connected to the same equipment to be aggregated as a PLA group. For MAC users,
a PLA group works as a single link.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 56


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

NOTE
Native TDM services on the Integrated IP radio links are irrelevant to the PLA.

Different from air-interface LAG, PLA dynamically allocates Ethernet traffic based on the real
time Ethernet bandwidth over each member radio link to achieve almost the same Ethernet
bandwidth utilization on member radio links. Except being free from impacts of the Ethernet
frame type and packet length, the load sharing mechanism used by PLA even does not require
the same Ethernet bandwidth on radio links involved. Moreover, this load sharing mechanism
is also able to ensure almost the same Ethernet bandwidth utilization on member links when the
Ethernet bandwidth changes differently on each member link.

Figure 6-4 PLA


Radio link 1
Native TDM Channel
Ethernet
Channel
Physical
Link
Aggregation
Ethernet
Channel

Native TDM Channel

Radio link 2

PLA helps to improve Ethernet service bandwidth utilization and reliability in integrated IP radio
mode when air-interface LAG does not apply (for example, when member radio links provide
different Ethernet bandwidths or the load sharing algorithm used by air-interface LAG cannot
implement load balancing between member radio links).

NOTE

l The member links in a PLA group must be carried by the same type of IF board (ISU2 or ISX2).
l In the current version, PLA aggregates only two links, which means that a PLA group can contain only one
main port and one slave port. The IF boards where the main and slave ports are located must be installed in
two paired slots.

6.2 Configuration Procedure


The configuration procedures of different radio link configuration methods are different.

Figure 6-5 provides the procedures for configuring radio links.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 57


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Figure 6-5 Configuration flowchart (radio links)


Configure TDM radio links (with Configure TDM radio links Configure IP radio links (with XPIC Configure IP radio links (without
XPIC function) (without XPIC function) function) XPIC function)

Start Start Start Start

Configure IF/ODU Configure IF/ODU Configure IF/ODU Configure IF/ODU


information for radio links information for radio links information for radio links information for radio links

Create XPIC working Configure IF


Configure IF 1+1
1+1 Create XPIC working Configure IF 1+1
groups protection
protection groups protection

Configure IF
Configure IF 1+1
1+1 Configure AM attributes
Configure IF/ODU Configure IF/ODU
protection
protection for XPIC function
information for radio links information for radio links

Configure IF/ODU Configure IF


Configure IF 1+1
1+1
Configure ATPC function Configure ATPC function
information for radio links protection
protection

Configure ODU power Configure AM advanced


Configure ODU power attributes Configure IF/ODU
attributes attributes
information for radio links

Create radio links by


Configure N+1 protection Configure AM advanced
using the search Configure ODU power
attributes
method attributes

Create radio links by


End using the search Configure ODU power
method attributes Configuring physical link
aggregation (PLA)

End Configuring physical link


aggregation (PLA)
Configure N+1 protection

Create radio links by


Compulsory using the search
Create radio links by
method
using the search
method
Optional
End
End

The procedures in the configuration flowchart are described as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 58


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Procedure for Configuring TDM Radio Links (with the XPIC Function Enabled)

Table 6-1 Procedure for configuring TDM radio links (with the XPIC function enabled)

Operation Description

A.3.4 Configuring the IF/ For the ISX2, set IF Service Type for the IF boards in both
ODU Information of a the vertically and horizontally polarized directions of an XPIC
Radio Link workgroup according to the plan.
NOTE
The default value of IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).

A.3.2 Creating an XPIC Required.


Workgroup Set the parameters according to the network plan.

A.3.1 Creating an IF 1+1 Required when two XPIC workgroups need to form two IF 1
Protection Group +1 protection groups.
Set the parameters according to the network plan.
NOTE
One XPIC workgroup cannot form an IF 1+1 protection group. The
radio link in the horizontal/vertical polarization direction of the XPIC
workgroup can form an IF 1+1 protection group with the radio link in
the horizontal/vertical polarization direction of the other XPIC
workgroup.

A.3.4 Configuring the IF/ Required.


ODU Information of a Set Power to Be Received(dBm) to the received signal level
Radio Link specified in the network plan. The antenna non-alignment
indication function can be enabled only after this parameter is
set. When the antenna non-alignment indication function is
enabled, the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the
ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off) if the actual
receive power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power
expected to be received. This indicates that the antenna is not
aligned. After the antennas are aligned for consecutive 30
minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna non-
alignment indication function.

A.6.9.3 Setting ODU Optional.


Power Attributes TX High Threshold(dBm), TX Low Threshold(dBm), RX
High Threshold(dBm), and RX Low Threshold(dBm)
affect only the performance events associated with ATPC.
Therefore, determine whether to set these parameters
according to the actual requirements.

A.2.5.1 Creating Optical In normal cases, the main topology displays the previously
Fibers by Using the Search created radio links.
Method

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 59


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

NOTE

l During the site commissioning, you can configure the two XPIC links as two separate non-XPIC links.
l The preceding parameters need to be set to the same values, separately for the radio links in the vertical and
horizontal polarization directions.
l For radio links configured with 1+1 HSB/SD, you need to configure the IF and ODU information on the
main radio link only. For radio links configured with 1+1 FD, you need to configure the IF and ODU
information on the main radio link and the ODU information on the standby radio link.

Procedure for Configuring TDM Radio Links (with the XPIC Function Disabled)

Table 6-2 Procedure for configuring TDM radio links (with the XPIC function disabled)

Operation Description

A.3.4 Configuring the IF/ For the ISU2 and ISX2, set IF Service Type to SDH.
ODU Information of a NOTE
Radio Link The default value of IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).

A.3.1 Creating an IF 1+1 Required when the radio links are configured with 1+1
Protection Groupa protection.
Set the parameters according to the network plan.

A.3.4 Configuring the IF/ Required. Set the parameters as follows:


ODU Information of a l Set Work Mode and Link ID according to the network
Radio Linka plan.
l Set TX Frequency(MHz), T/R Spacing(MHz), and TX
Power(dBm) according to the network plan.
l Set TX Status to unmute.
l Set Power to Be Received(dBm) to the received signal
level specified in the network plan. The antenna non-
alignment indication function can be enabled only after this
parameter is set. When the antenna non-alignment
indication function is enabled, the ODU indicator on the
IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on,
300 ms off) if the actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB
lower than the power expected to be received. This
indicates that the antenna is not aligned. After the antennas
are aligned for consecutive 30 minutes, the NE
automatically disables the antenna non-alignment
indication function.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 60


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Operation Description

A.6.8.2 Configuring ATPC Required when the ATPC function needs to be used.
Attributesa l If the ATPC function needs to be used, set ATPC Enable
Status to Enabled.
l During site commissioning, set ATPC Enable Status to
Disabled.
l It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper Threshold
(dBm) to the central value plus 10 dB.
l It is recommended that you set ATPC Lower Threshold
(dBm) to the central value minus 10 dB.
l It is recommended that you set ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable Status to Disabled.

A.6.9.3 Setting ODU Optional.


Power Attributesa l To set the maximum transmit power allowed by the ATPC
adjustment function, you need to set Maximum Transmit
Power(dBm) according to the actual requirements.
l TX High Threshold(dBm), TX Low Threshold(dBm),
RX High Threshold(dBm), and RX Low Threshold
(dBm) affect only the performance events associated with
ATPC. Therefore, determine whether to set these
parameters according to the actual requirements.

A.3.6 Creating an N+1 Required when the radio links are configured with N+1
Protection Group protection.
Set the attributes of the N+1 protection group to the same
values for the equipment at both ends.
Set the parameters according to the network plan.

A.2.5.1 Creating Optical In normal cases, the main topology displays the previously
Fibers by Using the Search created radio links.
Method

NOTE

l a: Generally, during the site commissioning, the previous steps are completed. After the site commissioning,
however, you need to reset ATPC Enable Status.
l For radio links configured with 1+1 HSB/SD, you need to configure the IF and ODU information on the
main radio link only. For radio links configured with 1+1 FD, you need to configure the IF and ODU
information on the main radio link and the ODU information on the standby radio link.
l For TDM radio links configured with N+1 protection, you need to configure the IF and ODU information
on each link. Work Mode must be configured as 7, STM-1, 28MHz, 128QAM.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 61


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Procedure for Configuring Integrated IP radio Links (with the XPIC Function
Enabled)

Table 6-3 Procedure for configuring Integrated IP radio links (with the XPIC function enabled)

Operation Description

A.3.4 Configuring the IF/ODU For the ISX2, set IF Service Type for the IF boards in
Information of a Radio Link both the vertically and horizontally polarized
directions of an XPIC workgroup according to the plan.
NOTE
The default value of IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1
+ETH).

A.3.2 Creating an XPIC Required.


Workgroup Set the parameters according to the network plan.

A.3.3 Setting the AM Attributes Required.


of the XPIC Workgroup Set the parameters according to the network plan. The
parameters in both polarization directions need to take
the same values.

A.3.1 Creating an IF 1+1 Required when two XPIC workgroups need to form
Protection Group two IF 1+1 protection groups.
Set the parameters according to the network plan.
NOTE
One XPIC workgroup cannot form an IF 1+1 protection
group. The radio link in the horizontal/vertical polarization
direction of the XPIC workgroup can form an IF 1+1
protection group with the radio link in the horizontal/vertical
polarization direction of the other XPIC workgroup.

A.3.4 Configuring the IF/ODU Required.


Information of a Radio Link l Set Power to Be Received(dBm) to the received
signal level specified in the network plan. The
antenna non-alignment indication function can be
enabled only after this parameter is set. When the
antenna non-alignment indication function is
enabled, the ODU indicator on the IF board
connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on,
300 ms off) if the actual receive power of the ODU
is 3 dB lower than the power expected to be
received. This indicates that the antenna is not
aligned. After the antennas are aligned for
consecutive 30 minutes, the NE automatically
disables the antenna non-alignment indication
function.
l To enable the E1 priority function, set Enable E1
Priority to Enabled. In addition, set Guarantee
E1 Capacity and Full E1 Capacity according to
the network plan.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 62


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Operation Description

A.6.8.3 Setting Advanced AM Optional.


Attributes To ensure that a specific number of E1s can be
transmitted in intermediate modulation schemes,
adjust the E1 capacity in each modulation scheme
according to the network plan. Generally, it is
recommended that you use the default values.

A.6.9.3 Setting ODU Power Optional.


Attributes TX High Threshold(dBm), TX Low Threshold
(dBm), RX High Threshold(dBm), and RX Low
Threshold(dBm) affect only the performance events
associated with ATPC. Therefore, determine whether
to set these parameters according to the actual
requirements.

Configuring A.3.12 Creating Required when an XPIC workgroup consisting of the


physical link a PLA Group ISX2 needs to use the PLA feature.
aggregation Set PLA-associated parameters according to the
(PLA) network plan.
NOTE
l In V100R003C03, PLA aggregates only two links, which
means that a PLA group can contain only one main port
and one slave port. The IF boards where the main and
slave ports are located must be installed in two paired
slots.
l IF boards are reset (cold) during creation or deletion of a
PLA group.
l PLA can work together with adaptive modulation (AM).
Member links in a PLA group can use different Hybrid/
AM attributes and modulation modes.
l The two members of an XPIC workgroup can form a PLA
group, providing Ethernet service protection between the
vertical and horizontal polarization directions. One
member in an XPIC workgroup and one member in
another XPIC workgroup cannot form a PLA group.
l Native TDM services in Integrated IP radio links are
irrelevant to the PLA group consisting of the Integrated
IP radio links, and need to be configured separately on the
Integrated IP radio links.

A.3.13 Querying Set Minimum Active Links according to the network


the Status of a plan. Generally, it is recommended that this parameter
PLA Group takes the default value.
When PLA and Ethernet ring protection switching
(ERPS) coexist and Minimum Active Links is not 1,
ERPS switching can be triggered if some member links
in the PLA group fail.

A.2.5.1 Creating Optical Fibers In normal cases, the main topology displays the
by Using the Search Method previously created radio links.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 63


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

NOTE

l During the site commissioning, you can configure the two XPIC links as two separate non-XPIC links
according to Table 6-4.
l The preceding parameters need to be set to the same values, separately for the radio links in the vertical and
horizontal polarization directions.
l For radio links configured with 1+1 HSB/SD, you need to configure the IF and ODU information on the
main radio link only. For radio links configured with 1+1 FD, you need to configure the IF and ODU
information on the main radio link and the ODU information on the standby radio link.
l The MW_CFG_MISMATCH alarm is reported if the E1 count, AM enabled status, 1588 timeslot enabled
status, modulation scheme, or STM-1 count is set inconsistently for both ends of an Integrated IP radio link.
Clear this alarm immediately. Otherwise, service configurations may be applied unsuccessfully or services
may be interrupted.

Procedure for Configuring Integrated IP radio links (with the XPIC Function
Disabled)

Table 6-4 Procedure for configuring Integrated IP radio links (with the XPIC function disabled)

Operation Description

A.3.4 Configuring the IF/ODU For the ISU2 and ISX2, set IF Service Type
Information of a Radio Link according to the plan.
NOTE
The default value of IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native
E1+ETH).

A.3.1 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Required when the radio links are configured with
Groupa IF 1+1 protection.
Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 64


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Operation Description

A.3.4 Configuring the IF/ODU Required. Set the parameters as follows:


Information of a Radio Linka l Set AM Enable Status and IF Channel
Bandwidth according to the network plan.
l When the AM function is enabled on the radio
links, set Modulation Mode of the
Guarantee AM Capacity and Modulation
Mode of the Full AM Capacity according to
the network plan.
l When the AM function is disabled on the radio
links, set Manually Specified Modulation
Mode according to the network plan.
l During site commissioning, set AM Enable
Status to Disabled. In addition, set Manually
Specified Modulation Mode to Modulation
Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity that is
planned.
l Set Full E1 Capacity and Link ID according
to the network plan.
l Set TX Frequency(MHz), T/R Spacing
(MHz), and TX Power(dBm) according to
the network plan.
l Set TX Status to unmute.
l Set Power to Be Received(dBm) to the
received signal level specified in the network
planning information. The antenna non-
alignment indication function can be enabled
only after this parameter is set. When the
antenna non-alignment indication function is
enabled, the ODU indicator on the IF board
connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms
on, 300 ms off) if the actual receive power of
the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power
expected to be received. This indicates that the
antenna is not aligned. After the antennas are
aligned for consecutive 30 minutes, the NE
automatically disables the antenna non-
alignment indication function.
l To enable the E1 priority function, set Enable
E1 Priority to Enabled. In addition, set
Guarantee E1 Capacity and Full E1
Capacity according to the network plan.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 65


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Operation Description

A.6.8.2 Configuring ATPC Attributesa Required when the ATPC function needs to be
used.
l If the ATPC function needs to be used, set
ATPC Enable Status to Enabled.
l During site commissioning, set ATPC Enable
Status to Disabled.
l It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm) to the central value plus 10
dB.
l It is recommended that you set ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm) to the central value minus
10 dB.
l It is recommended that you set ATPC
Automatic Threshold Enable Status to
Disabled.

A.6.8.3 Setting Advanced AM Optional.


Attributesa To ensure that a specific number of E1s can be
transmitted in intermediate modulation schemes,
adjust the E1 capacity in each modulation scheme
according to the network planning information.
Generally, it is recommended that you use the
default values.

A.6.9.3 Setting ODU Power Optional.


Attributesa l To set the maximum transmit power allowed
by the ATPC adjustment function, you need to
set Maximum Transmit Power(dBm)
according to the actual requirements.
l TX High Threshold(dBm), TX Low
Threshold(dBm), RX High Threshold
(dBm), and RX Low Threshold(dBm) affect
only the performance events associated with
ATPC. Therefore, determine whether to set
these parameters according to the actual
requirements.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 66


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Operation Description

Configuring A.3.12 Creating a Required when the ISU2/ISX2 needs to use the
PLA PLA Group PLA feature.
Set PLA-associated parameters according to the
network plan.
NOTE
l In V100R003C03, PLA aggregates only two links,
which means that a PLA group can contain only one
main port and one slave port. The IF boards where
the main and slave ports are located must be
installed in two paired slots.
l IF boards are reset (cold) during creation or deletion
of a PLA group.
l PLA can work together with adaptive modulation
(AM). Member links in a PLA group can use
different Hybrid/AM attributes and modulation
modes.
l Native TDM services in Integrated IP radio links
are irrelevant to the PLA group consisting of the
Integrated IP radio links, and need to be configured
separately on the Integrated IP radio links.

A.3.13 Querying the Set Minimum Active Links according to the


Status of a PLA network plan. Generally, it is recommended that
Group this parameter takes the default value.
NOTE
When PLA and ERPS coexist and Minimum Active
Links is not 1, ERPS switching can be triggered if some
member links in the PLA group fail.

A.3.6 Creating an N+1 Protection Required when the radio links are configured with
Group N+1 protection.
Set the attributes of the N+1 protection group to
the same values for the equipment at both ends.
Set the parameters according to the network plan.

A.2.5.1 Creating Optical Fibers by In normal cases, the main topology displays the
Using the Search Method previously created radio links.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 67


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

NOTE

l a: Generally, during the site commissioning, the previous steps are completed. After the site commissioning,
however, you need to reset AM Enable Status and ATPC Enable Status.
l For radio links configured with 1+1 HSB/SD, you need to configure the IF and ODU information on the
main radio link only. For radio links configured with 1+1 FD, you need to configure the IF and ODU
information on the main radio link and the ODU information on the standby radio link.
l To configure Integrated IP radio links with N+1 protection, you need to configure the IF and ODU
information on each link.
l The MW_CFG_MISMATCH alarm is reported if the E1 count, AM enabled status, 1588 timeslot enabled
status, modulation mode, or STM-1 count is set inconsistently for both ends of an Integrated IP radio link.
Clear this alarm immediately. Otherwise, service configurations may be applied unsuccessfully or services
may be interrupted.

6.3 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the TDM Radio


Chain Network)
This section considers radio links on a TDM radio chain network as examples to describe how
to configure radio links according to the planning information.

6.3.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking information about the NEs.

Based on 5.3 Configuration Example (TDM Radio Chain Network Topology), configure the
TDM radio links according to the following network planning information (as shown in Figure
6-6):

l The service capacity accessed by each BTS is provided in Table 6-5.

Table 6-5 Service capacity accessed by each BTS

BTS BTS11 BTS12 BTS13 BTS14 BTS15

Number of 16 8 8 14 8
E1 services

l To improve transmission reliability of important services, the radio links between NE11
and NE12, between NE13 and NE14, and between NE13 and NE15 are configured with 1
+1 HSB protection.
l The ATPC function is enabled to reduce inter-site interference.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 68


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Figure 6-6 Networking diagram (TDM radio chain network)


102
14952M 101
BTS12 14930M
14532M
16E1,14M,16QAM 14510M
STM-1,28M,128QAM
1+1 HSB
1+1 HSB
H-polarization
V-polarzation
BTS13
Tx high NE13 NE12 NE11
104 Tx low
14930M NE14 Tx high Third party
Tx low
14510M Tx high Tx low SDH network
8E1,7M,16QAM
1+0 103
H-polarzation 14967M
14547M BTS11
Tx high 22E1,14M,32QAM
NE15 1+1 HSB Link ID
Tx low V-polarization Tx high station Tx Freq.
Tx low station Tx Freq.
NE16 Radio work mode
BTS14 RF configuarion
Polarization
BTS15

The connections of radio links shown in Figure 6-6 are described as follows.

Table 6-6 Connections of radio links (NE11)

Link Port Description

Between NE11 and NE12 3-IF1 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
5-IF1 (standby IF board)

Table 6-7 Connections of radio links (NE12)

Link Port Description

Between NE12 and NE11 3-IF1 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
5-IF1 (standby IF board)

Table 6-8 Connections of radio links (NE13)

Link Port Description

Between NE13 and NE14 3-IF1 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
5-IF1 (standby IF board)

Between NE13 and NE15 4-IF1 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
6-IF1 (standby IF board)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 69


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Table 6-9 Connections of radio links (NE14)

Link Port Description

Between NE14 and NE13 3-IF1 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
5-IF1 (standby IF board)

Table 6-10 Connections of radio links (NE15)

Link Port Description

Between NE15 and NE13 4-IF1 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
6-IF1 (standby IF board)

Between NE15 and NE16 3-IF1 Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Table 6-11 Connections of radio links (NE16)

Link Port Description

Between NE16 and NE15 3-IF1 Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

6.3.2 Service Planning


The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for
configuring the NE data.

Basic Information About Radio Links


According to the spectrum allocation on the radio network and the required radio transmission
capacity, you can obtain the basic information about the radio links, as provided in Table
6-12.

Table 6-12 Basic information about radio links

Parameter Link 1 Link 2 Link 3 Link 4

Link ID 101 102 103 104

Tx high site NE11 NE14 NE15 NE15

Tx low site NE12 NE13 NE13 NE16

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 70


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter Link 1 Link 2 Link 3 Link 4

Tx frequency at 14930 14952 14967 14930


the Tx high site
(MHz)

Tx frequency at 14510 14532 14547 14510


the Tx low site
(MHz)

T/R spacing 420 420 420 420


(MHz)

Radio working STM-1, 16E1, 14MHz, 22E1, 14MHz, 8E1, 7MHz,


mode 28MHz, 16QAM 32QAM 16QAM
128QAM

RF 1+1 HSB 1+1 HSB 1+1 HSB 1+0


configuration
mode

Polarization V (vertical H (horizontal V (vertical H (horizontal


direction polarization) polarization) polarization) polarization)

NOTE

l To prevent interference on a microwave site, it is recommended that you plan the microwave site as
only a TX high site or a TX low site at a time.
l To prevent interference between two radio links on a microwave site that use transmit frequencies with
a small spacing between, it is recommended that you set the two radio links to operate in different
polarization directions.
l The planning information that is not related to the configuration of the IDU (except for the polarization
direction) is not provided in this example.

Power and ATPC Information


By using the radio network planning software such as the Pathloss, you can analyze and compute
the availability of services and parameters of radio links. Then, you can obtain the power and
ATPC information of the radio links as provided in Table 6-13.

Table 6-13 Power and ATPC information

Parameter Link 1 Link 2 Link 3 Link 4

Transmit power 5 (NE11) 10 (NE13) 10 (NE13) 15 (NE15)


(dBm) 5 (NE12) 10 (NE14) 10 (NE15) 15 (NE16)

Receive power -42 (NE11) -44 (NE13) -43 (NE13) -48 (NE15)
(dBm) -42 (NE12) -44 (NE14) -43 (NE15) -48 (NE16)

ATPC enabling Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 71


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter Link 1 Link 2 Link 3 Link 4

ATPC Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled


automatic
threshold
enabling

Upper threshold -32 (NE11) -34 (NE13) -33 (NE13) -38 (NE15)
of ATPC -32 (NE12) -34 (NE14) -33 (NE15) -38 (NE16)
adjustment
(dBm)

Lower threshold -52 (NE11) -54 (NE13) -53 (NE13) -58 (NE15)
of ATPC -52 (NE12) -54 (NE14) -53 (NE15) -58 (NE16)
adjustment
(dBm)

Maximum - - - -
transmit power
(dBm)

NOTE

l In this example, the ATPC is enabled to reduce the inter-site interference. The ATPC may be disabled if
there is no such a requirement.
l The ATPC controls the receive power within a range, namely, (2 dB more or less than the central value
between the upper threshold and lower threshold of ATPC adjustment). Hence, this example sets the upper
threshold to 10 dB higher than the receive power, and the lower threshold is 10 dB lower than the receive
power.
l The maximum transmit power is the actual maximum transmit power of the ODU after the ATPC is enabled.
When this parameter is not specified, the value of the parameter is the rated maximum transmit power of
the ODU. If the ODU works at the rated maximum transmit power, the electromagnetic wave agrees with
the spectrum configuration profile. Hence, this parameter is not set generally.

Information of IF Boards
According to the radio type, slot priorities of IF boards, and configuration rules of the 1+1
protection, you can obtain the information of IF boards as provided in Table 6-14.

Table 6-14 Information of IF boards

Parameter Link 1 Link 2 Link 3 Link 4

Main IF board 3-IF1 (NE11) 3-IF1 (NE13) 4-IF1 (NE13) 3-IF1 (NE15)
3-IF1 (NE12) 3-IF1 (NE14) 4-IF1 (NE15) 3-IF1 (NE16)

Standby IF 5-IF1 (NE11) 5-IF1 (NE13) 6-IF1 (NE13) -


board 5-IF1 (NE12) 5-IF1 (NE14) 6-IF1 (NE15)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 72


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter Link 1 Link 2 Link 3 Link 4

RF 1+1 HSB 1+1 HSB 1+1 HSB 1+0


configuration
mode

Revertive mode Revertive Revertive Revertive -


(default value) (default value) (default value)

WTR time(s) 600 (default 600 (default 600 (default -


value) value) value)

Reverse Disabled Disabled Disabled -


switching
enabling

Alarm report Alarm reporting Alarm reporting Alarm reporting -


mode by protection by protection by protection
group group group

Anti-jitter time 300s (default 300s (default 300s (default -


value) value) value)

NOTE

l It is recommended that you configure the two IF boards that construct the 1+1 HSB protection group in slot
3 and slot 5, slot 4 and slot 6, or slot 1 and slot 2. In addition, it is recommended that you configure the main
IF board in the slot with the smaller slot number.
l It is recommended that you configure the two IF boards that construct the 1+1 FD/SD protection group in
slot 3 and slot 5, slot 4 and slot 6, or slot 1 and slot 2. In addition, it is recommended that you configure the
main IF board in the slot with the smaller slot number.
l In 1+1 HSB configuration, it is recommended that you disable the reverse switching function. In 1+1 SD
configuration, it is recommended that you enable the reverse switching function.
l Unless otherwise specified, it is recommended that alarms be reported by protection group.
l Unless otherwise specified the other parameters of the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD all take default values.

6.3.3 Configuration Process


This section describes the procedures for the data configuration.

Procedure
Step 1 See A.3.1 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group and create the IF 1+1 protection groups for
NE11 to NE15.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE11 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE11

Working Mode HSB

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 73


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter Value

NE11

Revertive Mode Revertive mode

WTR Time(s) 600

Enable Reverse Switching Disabled

Working Board 3-IF1

Protection Board 5-IF1

Alarm Report Mode Only Protection group alarms

Anti-jitter Time(s) 300

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE12

Working Mode HSB

Revertive Mode Revertive mode

WTR Time(s) 600

Enable Reverse Switching Disabled

Working Board 3-IF1

Protection Board 5-IF1

Alarm Report Mode Only Protection group alarms

Anti-jitter Time(s) 300

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE13 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE13

Working Mode HSB HSB

Revertive Mode Revertive mode Revertive mode

WTR Time(s) 600 600

Enable Reverse Switching Disabled Disabled

Working Board 3-IF1 4-IF1

Protection Board 5-IF1 6-IF1

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 74


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter Value

NE13

Alarm Report Mode Only Protection group Only Protection group


alarms alarms

Anti-jitter Time(s) 300 300

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE14

Working Mode HSB

Revertive Mode Revertive mode

WTR Time(s) 600

Enable Reverse Switching Disabled

Working Board 3-IF1

Protection Board 5-IF1

Alarm Report Mode Only Protection group alarms

Anti-jitter Time(s) 300

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE15 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE15

Working Mode HSB

Revertive Mode Revertive mode

WTR Time(s) 600

Enable Reverse Switching Disabled

Working Board 4-IF1

Protection Board 6-IF1

Alarm Report Mode Only Protection group alarms

Anti-jitter Time(s) 300

Step 2 See A.3.4 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link and configure the IF/ODU
information of the radio link.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 75


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE11 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-IF1 and 23-ODU

Work Mode 7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM

Link ID 101

TX Frequency(MHz) 14930

T/R Spacing(MHz) 420

TX Power(dBm) 5

Power to Be Received(dBm) -42

TX Status unmute

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-IF1 and 23-ODU

Work Mode 7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM

Link ID 101

TX Frequency(MHz) 14510

T/R Spacing(MHz) 420

TX Power(dBm) 5

Power to Be Received(dBm) -42

TX Status unmute

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE13 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-IF1 and 23-ODU 4-IF1 and 24-ODU

Work Mode 6,16E1,14MHz,16QAM 8,22E1,14MHz,32QAM

Link ID 102 103

TX Frequency(MHz) 14532 14547

T/R Spacing(MHz) 420 420

TX Power(dBm) 10 10

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 76


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter Value

3-IF1 and 23-ODU 4-IF1 and 24-ODU

Power to Be Received -44 -43


(dBm)

TX Status unmute unmute

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-IF1 and 23-ODU

Work Mode 6,16E1,14MHz,16QAM

Link ID 102

TX Frequency(MHz) 14952

T/R Spacing(MHz) 420

TX Power(dBm) 10

Power to Be Received(dBm) -44

TX Status unmute

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE15 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-IF1 and 23-ODU 4-IF1 and 24-ODU

Work Mode 4,8E1,7MHz,16QAM 8,22E1,14MHz,32QAM

Link ID 104 103

TX Frequency(MHz) 14930 14967

T/R Spacing(MHz) 420 420

TX Power(dBm) 15 10

Power to Be Received -48 -43


(dBm)

TX Status unmute unmute

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE16 are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 77


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter Value

3-IF1 and 23-ODU

Work Mode 4,8E1,7MHz,16QAM

Link ID 104

TX Frequency(MHz) 14510

T/R Spacing(MHz) 420

TX Power(dBm) 15

Power to Be Received(dBm) -48

TX Status unmute

Step 3 See A.6.8.2 Configuring ATPC Attributes and configure the ATPC function.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE11 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-IF1 and 23-ODU

ATPC Enable Status Enabled

ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) -32

ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) -52

ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Disabled


Status

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-IF1 and 23-ODU

ATPC Enable Status Enabled

ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) -32

ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) -52

ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Disabled


Status

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE13 are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 78


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter Value

3-IF1 and 23-ODU 4-IF1 and 24-ODU

ATPC Enable Status Enabled Enabled

ATPC Upper Threshold -34 -33


(dBm)

ATPC Lower Threshold -54 -53


(dBm)

ATPC Automatic Disabled Disabled


Threshold Enable Status

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-IF1 and 23-ODU

ATPC Enable Status Enabled

ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) -34

ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) -54

ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Disabled


Status

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE15 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-IF1 and 23-ODU 4-IF1 and 24-ODU

ATPC Enable Status Enabled Enabled

ATPC Upper Threshold -38 -33


(dBm)

ATPC Lower Threshold -58 -53


(dBm)

ATPC Automatic Disabled Disabled


Threshold Enable Status

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE16 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-IF1 and 23-ODU

ATPC Enable Status Enabled

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 79


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter Value

3-IF1 and 23-ODU

ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) -38

ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) -58

ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Disabled


Status

Step 4 See A.2.5.1 Creating Optical Fibers by Using the Search Method and create radio links
connections.
The main topology should display all the created radio links.

----End

6.4 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the TDM Radio


Ring Network)
This section considers TDM radio links on a TDM radio ring network as examples to describe
how to configure radio links according to the network planning information.

6.4.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking information about the NEs.

Based on 5.4 Configuration Example (TDM Radio Ring Network Topology), configure the
TDM radio links according to the network planning information (as shown in Figure 6-7):

l The service capacity accessed by each BTS is provided in Table 6-15.

Table 6-15 Service capacity accessed by each BTS

BTS BTS21 BTS22 BTS23 BTS24

Number of E1 4 4 4 4
services

l To improve transmission reliability of important services, the radio links between NE21
and NE24 are configured with 1+1 SD protection.
l The ATPC function is enabled to reduce inter-site interference.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 80


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Figure 6-7 Networking diagram (TDM radio ring network)

Third party
SDH network

201 204
14930M 14958M
14510M 14538M
16E1,14M,16QAM NE21 16E1,14M,16QAM
1+0 1+1
V-polarzation V-polarization

Tx high Tx high
Tx low Tx low
BTS21

Tx low Tx low
NE22 NE24 BTS24
Tx high Tx high
BTS22 202 203
14958M 14930M
14538M 14510M
16E1,14M,16QAM 4E1 16E1,14M,16QAM
1+0 1+0
H-polarization NE23 H-polarzation
BTS23

Link ID
Tx high station Tx Freq.
Tx low station Tx Freq.
Radio work mode
RF configuarion
Polarization

The connections of radio links shown in Figure 6-7 are described as follows.

Table 6-16 Connections of radio links (NE21)

Link Port Description

Between NE21 and NE22 4-IF1 Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Between NE21 and NE24 3-IF1 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
SD protection group.
5-IF1 (standby IF board)

Table 6-17 Connections of radio links (NE22)

Link Port Description

Between NE22 and NE21 3-IF1 Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 81


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Link Port Description

Between NE22 and NE23 4-IF1 Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Table 6-18 Connections of radio links (NE23)

Link Port Description

Between NE23 and NE22 3-IF1 Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Between NE23 and NE24 4-IF1 Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Table 6-19 Connections of radio links (NE24)

Link Port Description

Between NE24 and NE21 4-IF1 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
6-IF1 (standby IF board)

Between NE24 and NE23 3-IF1 Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

6.4.2 Service Planning


The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for
configuring the NE data.

Basic Information About Radio Links


According to the spectrum allocation on the radio network and the required radio transmission
capacity, you can obtain the basic information about the radio links as provided in Table 6-20.

Table 6-20 Basic information about radio links

Parameter Link 1 Link 2 Link 3 Link 4

Link ID 201 202 203 204

Tx high site NE21 NE23 NE23 NE21

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 82


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter Link 1 Link 2 Link 3 Link 4

Tx low site NE22 NE22 NE24 NE24

Tx frequency at 14930 14958 14930 14958


the Tx high site
(MHz)

Tx frequency at 14510 14538 14510 14538


the Tx low site
(MHz)

T/R spacing 420 420 420 420


(MHz)

Radio working 16E1, 14MHz, 16E1, 14MHz, 16E1, 14MHz, 16E1, 14MHz,
mode 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM

RF 1+0 1+0 1+0 1+1 SD


configuration
mode

Polarization V (vertical H (horizontal H (horizontal V (vertical


direction polarization) polarization) polarization) polarization)

NOTE

The planning information that is not related to the configuration of the IDU (except for the polarization
direction) is not provided in this example.

Power and ATPC Information


By using the radio network planning software such as the Pathloss, you can analyze and compute
the availability of services and parameters of radio links. Then, you can obtain the power and
ATPC information about the radio links, as provided in Table 6-21.

Table 6-21 Power and ATPC information

Parameter Link 1 Link 2 Link 3 Link 4

Transmit power 9 (NE21) 10 (NE23) 10 (NE23) 8 (NE21)


(dBm) 9 (NE22) 10 (NE22) 10 (NE24) 8 (NE24)

Receive power -46 (NE21) -44 (NE23) -43 (NE23) -47 (NE21)
(dBm) -46 (NE22) -44 (NE22) -43 (NE24) -47 (NE24)

ATPC enabling Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

ATPC Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled


automatic
threshold
enabling

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 83


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter Link 1 Link 2 Link 3 Link 4

Upper threshold -36 (NE21) -34 (NE23) -33 (NE23) -37 (NE21)
of ATPC -36 (NE22) -34 (NE22) -33 (NE24) -37 (NE24)
adjustment
(dBm)

Lower threshold -56 (NE21) -54 (NE23) -53 (NE23) -57 (NE21)
of ATPC -56 (NE22) -54 (NE22) -53 (NE24) -57 (NE24)
adjustment
(dBm)

Maximum - - - -
transmit power
(dBm)

NOTE

l In this example, the ATPC is enabled to reduce the inter-site interference. The ATPC may be disabled if
there is no such a requirement.
l The ATPC controls the receive power within a range, namely, (2 dB more or less than the central value of
the upper threshold and lower threshold of ATPC adjustment). Hence, this example sets the upper threshold
to 10 dB higher than the receive power, and the lower threshold is 10 dB lower than the receive power.
l The maximum transmit power is the actual maximum transmit power of the ODU after the ATPC is enabled.
When this parameter is not specified, the value of the parameter is the rated maximum transmit power of
the ODU. If the ODU works at the rated maximum transmit power, the electromagnetic wave agrees with
the spectrum configuration profile. Hence, this parameter is not set generally.

Information About IF Boards


According to the radio type, slot priorities of IF boards, and configuration rules of the 1+1
protection, you can obtain the information about IF boards as provided in Table 6-22.

Table 6-22 Information of IF boards

Parameter Link 1 Link 2 Link 3 Link 4

Main IF board 4-IF1 (NE21) 4-IF1 (NE22) 4-IF1 (NE23) 4-IF1 (NE24)
3-IF1 (NE22) 3-IF1 (NE23) 3-IF1 (NE24) 3-IF1 (NE21)

Standby IF - - - 6-IF1 (NE24)


board 5-IF1 (NE21)

RF 1+0 1+0 1+0 1+1 SD


configuration
mode

Revertive mode - - - Revertive


(default value)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 84


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter Link 1 Link 2 Link 3 Link 4

WTR time(s) - - - 600 (default


value)

Reverse - - - Enabled
switching
enabling

Alarm report - - - Alarm reporting


mode by protection
group

Anti-jitter time - - - 300s (default


value)

NOTE

l It is recommended that you configure the two IF boards that construct the 1+1 HSB protection group in slot
3 and slot 5, slot 4 and slot 6, or slot 1 and slot 2. In addition, it is recommended that you configure the main
IF board in the slot with the smaller slot number.
l It is recommended that you configure the two IF boards that construct the 1+1 FD/SD protection group in
slot 3 and slot 5, slot 4 and slot 6, or slot 1 and slot 2. In addition, it is recommended that you configure the
main IF board in the slot with the smaller slot number.
l In 1+1 HSB configuration, it is recommended that you disable the reverse switching function. In 1+1 SD
configuration, it is recommended that you enable the reverse switching function.
l Unless otherwise specified, it is recommended that alarms be reported by protection group.
l Unless otherwise specified, the other parameters of the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD all take default values.

6.4.3 Configuration Process


This section describes the procedures for the data configuration.

Procedure
Step 1 See A.3.1 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group and configure the 1+1 protection groups for
NE21 and NE24.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE21 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE21

Working Mode SD

Revertive Mode Revertive mode

WTR Time(s) 600

Enable Reverse Switching Enabled

Working Board 3-IF1

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 85


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter Value

NE21

Protection Board 5-IF1

Alarm Report Mode Only Protection group alarms

Anti-jitter Time(s) 300

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE24 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE24

Working Mode SD

Revertive Mode Revertive mode

WTR Time(s) 600

Enable Reverse Switching Enabled

Working Board 4-IF1

Protection Board 6-IF1

Alarm Report Mode Only Protection group alarms

Anti-jitter Time(s) 300

Step 2 See A.3.4 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link and configure the IF/ODU
information of the radio link.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE21 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-IF1 and 23-ODU 4-IF1 and 24-ODU

Work Mode 6,16E1,14MHz,16QAM 6,16E1,14MHz,16QAM

Link ID 204 201

TX Frequency(MHz) 14958 14930

T/R Spacing(MHz) 420 420

TX Power(dBm) 8 9

Power to Be Received -47 -46


(dBm)

TX Status unmute unmute

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 86


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE22 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-IF1 and 23-ODU 4-IF1 and 24-ODU

Work Mode 6, 16E1,14MHz, 16QAM 6, 16E1, 14MHz, 16QAM

Link ID 201 202

TX Frequency(MHz) 14510 14538

T/R Spacing(MHz) 420 420

TX Power(dBm) 9 10

Power to Be Received -46 -44


(dBm)

TX Status unmute unmute

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE23 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-IF1 and 23-ODU 4-IF1 and 24-ODU

Work Mode 6, 16E1, 14MHz, 16QAM 6, 16E1, 14MHz, 16QAM

Link ID 202 203

TX Frequency(MHz) 14958 14930

T/R Spacing(MHz) 420 420

TX Power(dBm) 10 10

Power to Be Received -44 -43


(dBm)

TX Status unmute unmute

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE24 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-IF1 and 23-ODU 4-IF1 and 24-ODU

Work Mode 6, 16E1, 14MHz, 16QAM 6, 16E1, 14MHz, 16QAM

Link ID 203 204

TX Frequency(MHz) 14510 14538

T/R Spacing(MHz) 420 420

TX Power(dBm) 10 8

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 87


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter Value

3-IF1 and 23-ODU 4-IF1 and 24-ODU

Power to Be Received -43 -47


(dBm)

TX Status unmute unmute

Step 3 See A.6.8.2 Configuring ATPC Attributes and configure the ATPC function.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE21 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-IF1 and 23-ODU 4-IF1 and 24-ODU

ATPC Enable Status Enabled Enabled

ATPC Upper Threshold -37 -36


(dBm)

ATPC Lower Threshold -57 -56


(dBm)

ATPC Automatic Disabled Disabled


Threshold Enable Status

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE22 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-IF1 and 23-ODU 4-IF1 and 24-ODU

ATPC Enable Status Enabled Enabled

ATPC Upper Threshold -36 -34


(dBm)

ATPC Lower Threshold -56 -54


(dBm)

ATPC Automatic Disabled Disabled


Threshold Enable Status

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE23 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-IF1 and 23-ODU 4-IF1 and 24-ODU

ATPC Enable Status Enabled Enabled

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 88


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter Value

3-IF1 and 23-ODU 4-IF1 and 24-ODU

ATPC Upper Threshold -34 -33


(dBm)

ATPC Lower Threshold -54 -53


(dBm)

ATPC Automatic Disabled Disabled


Threshold Enable Status

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE24 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-IF1 and 23-ODU 4-IF1 and 24-ODU

ATPC Enable Status Enabled Enabled

ATPC Upper Threshold -33 -37


(dBm)

ATPC Lower Threshold -53 -57


(dBm)

ATPC Automatic Disabled Disabled


Threshold Enable Status

Step 4 A.2.5.1 Creating Optical Fibers by Using the Search Method and create radio links
connections.
The main topology should display all the created radio links.

----End

6.5 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the Hybrid


Radio Chain Network)
This section considers radio links on a Hybrid radio chain network as examples to describe how
to configure radio links according to the network planning information.

6.5.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking information about the NEs.

Based on 5.5 Configuration Example (Hybrid Radio Chain Network), configure the Hybrid
radio links according to the following network planning information (as shown in Figure 6-8):

l Each Hybrid radio link transmits E1 services and Ethernet services. The AM function is
enabled on each link.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 89


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

l To improve transmission reliability of important services, the radio links between NE11
and NE12, between NE13 and NE14, and between NE13 and NE15 are configured with 1
+1 HSB protection.
l The service capacity accessed by each BTS is provided in Table 6-23.

Table 6-23 Service capacity accessed by each BTS

BTS BTS11 BTS12 BTS13 BTS14 BTS15

Number of 0 0 1 2 0
high-
priority E1s

Number of 0 0 0 2 0
low-priority
E1s

Capacity of 10 5 3 1 5
high-
priority
Ethernet
services
(Mbit/s)

Capacity of 35 15 24 20 19
low-priority
Ethernet
services
(Mbit/s)

NOTE

High-priority services are guaranteed with sufficient transmission resources and are not discarded even in
the case of an AM switch. Low-priority services are not guaranteed with sufficient transmission resources
and may be discarded in the case of an AM switch. The common service priorities are provided in Table
6-24.

Table 6-24 Common service priorities

Service Type Service Class

TDM E1s that transmit 2G base station High-priority services


services

ATM E1s (IMA E1s are not used) that High-priority services
transmit 3G base station services

E1s (of a bandwidth not lower than the High-priority service


high-priority service bandwidth) in the
IMA E1 group that transmits 3G base
station services

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 90


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Service Type Service Class

Other E1s in the IMA E1 group that Low-priority services


transmits 3G base station services

Voice, signaling, and OM Ethernet High-priority services


services

Streaming media, background, and Low-priority services


interactive Ethernet services, for example,
Internet services

Figure 6-8 Networking diagram (Hybrid radio chain network)


102
14952M 101
BTS12 14930M
14532M
14M 14510M
28M
1+1 HSB
1+1 HSB
H-polarization
V-polarzation
BTS13
Tx high NE13 NE12 NE11
104 Tx low
14930M NE14 Tx high Packet
Tx low
14510M Tx high Tx low network
7M
1+0 103
H-polarzation 14967M BTS11
14547M
Tx high 14M
NE15 1+1 HSB Link ID
Tx low V-polarization Tx high station Tx Freq.
Tx low station Tx Freq.
NE16 Channel spacing
BTS14 RF configuarion
Polarization
BTS15

The connections of radio links shown in Figure 6-8 are described as follows.

Table 6-25 Connections of radio links (NE11)

Link Port Description

Between NE11 and NE12 3-ISU2 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
5-ISU2 (standby IF board)

Table 6-26 Connections of radio links (NE12)

Link Port Description

Between NE12 and NE11 3-ISU2 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
5-ISU2 (standby IF board)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 91


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Table 6-27 Connections of radio links (NE13)

Link Port Description

Between NE13 and NE14 3-ISU2 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
5-ISU2 (standby IF board)

Between NE13 and NE15 4-ISU2 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
6-ISU2 (standby IF board)

Table 6-28 Connections of radio links (NE14)

Link Port Description

Between NE14 and NE13 3-ISU2 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
5-ISU2 (standby IF board)

Table 6-29 Connections of radio links (NE15)

Link Port Description

Between NE15 and NE13 4-ISU2 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
6-ISU2 (standby IF board)

Between NE15 and NE16 3-ISU2 Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Table 6-30 Connections of radio links (NE16)

Link Port Description

Between NE16 and NE15 3-ISU2 Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

6.5.2 Service Planning


This section provides the information about all the parameters required for configuring the NE
data.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 92


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Basic Information About Radio Links


According to the spectrum allocation on the radio network and the required radio transmission
capacity, you can obtain the basic information of the radio links, as provided in Table 6-31.

Table 6-31 Basic information about radio links

Parameter Link 1 Link 2 Link 3 Link 4

Link ID 101 102 103 104

Tx high site NE11 NE14 NE15 NE15

Tx low site NE12 NE13 NE13 NE16

Tx frequency at 14930 14952 14967 14930


the Tx high site
(MHz)

Tx frequency at 14510 14532 14547 14510


the Tx low site
(MHz)

T/R spacing 420 420 420 420


(MHz)

Channel 28 14 14 7
spacing (MHz)

RF 1+1 HSB 1+1 HSB 1+1 HSB 1+0


configuration
mode

Polarization V (vertical H (horizontal V (vertical H (horizontal


direction polarization) polarization) polarization) polarization)

NOTE

The planning information that is not related to the configuration of the IDU (except for the polarization
direction) is not provided in this example.

Hybrid/AM Attribute Information


According to the capacity of E1 and Ethernet services and the availability requirement, you can
calculate the Hybrid/AM attribute information, as provided in Table 6-32.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 93


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Table 6-32 Hybrid/AM attribute information

Parameter Link 1 Link 2 Link 3 Link 4

Number of E1s 3 1 2 0
in AM
guaranteed
capacity mode

Number of E1s 5 - 4 -
in AM full
capacity mode

Capacity of 24 8 6 5
high-priority
Ethernet
services (Mbit/
s)

Capacity of low- 113 39 39 19


priority
Ethernet
services (Mbit/
s)

AM enabling Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

AM guaranteed QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK


capacity mode

AM full 128QAM 32QAM 64QAM 32QAM


capacity mode

E1 priority Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled


enabling

NOTE

The Hybrid radio capacity and the AM function require the proper license file.

Power and ATPC Information


By using the radio network planning software such as the Pathloss, you can analyze and compute
the parameters of radio links and obtain the power and ATPC information of the radio links, as
provided in Table 6-33.

Table 6-33 Power and ATPC information

Parameter Link 1 Link 2 Link 3 Link 4

Transmit power 16.5 (NE11) 16.5 (NE13) 16 (NE13) 20 (NE15)


(dBm) 16.5 (NE12) 16.5 (NE14) 16 (NE15) 20 (NE16)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 94


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter Link 1 Link 2 Link 3 Link 4

Receive power -46 (NE11) -44 (NE13) -43 (NE13) -48 (NE15)
(dBm) -46 (NE12) -44 (NE14) -43 (NE15) -48 (NE16)

ATPC enabling Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

ATPC - - - -
automatic
threshold
enabling

Upper threshold - - - -
of ATPC
adjustment
(dBm)

Lower threshold - - - -
of ATPC
adjustment
(dBm)

Maximum - - - -
transmit power
(dBm)

NOTE

l The transmit power is calculated in AM guaranteed capacity mode.


l The receive power is calculated in AM guaranteed capacity mode.
l In this example, the ATPC function is disabled.

Information About IF Boards


According to the radio type, slot priorities of IF boards, and configuration rules of the 1+1
protection, you can obtain the information about IF boards, as provided in Table 6-34.

Table 6-34 Information about IF boards

Parameter Link 1 Link 2 Link 3 Link 4

Main IF board 3-ISU2 (NE11) 3-ISU2 (NE13) 4-ISU2 (NE13) 3-ISU2 (NE15)
3-ISU2 (NE12) 3-ISU2 (NE14) 4-ISU2 (NE15) 3-ISU2 (NE16)

Standby IF 5-ISU2 (NE11) 5-ISU2 (NE13) 6-ISU2 (NE13) -


board 5-ISU2 (NE12) 5-ISU2(NE14) 6-ISU2 (NE15)

RF 1+1 HSB 1+1 HSB 1+1 HSB 1+0


configuration
mode

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 95


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter Link 1 Link 2 Link 3 Link 4

Revertive mode Revertive Revertive Revertive -


(default value) (default value) (default value)

WTR time(s) 600 (default 600 (default 600 (default -


value) value) value)

Reverse Disabled Disabled Disabled -


switching
enabling

Alarm report Alarm reporting Alarm reporting Alarm reporting -


mode by protection by protection by protection
group group group

Anti-jitter time 300s (default 300s (default 300s (default -


value) value) value)

NOTE

l It is recommended that you configure the two IF boards that construct the 1+1 HSB protection group in slot
3 and slot 5, slot 4 and slot 6, or slot 1 and slot 2. In addition, it is recommended that you configure the main
IF board in the slot with the smaller slot number.
l It is recommended that you configure the two IF boards that construct the 1+1 FD/SD protection group in
slot 3 and slot 5, slot 4 and slot 6, or slot 1 and slot 2. In addition, it is recommended that you configure the
main IF board in the slot with the smaller slot number.
l In 1+1 HSB configuration, it is recommended that you disable the reverse switching function. In 1+1 SD
configuration, it is recommended that you enable the reverse switching function.
l Unless otherwise specified, it is recommended that alarms be reported by protection group.
l Unless otherwise specified the other parameters of the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD all take default values.

6.5.3 Configuration Process


This section describes the procedures for the data configuration.

Procedure
Step 1 See A.3.1 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group and create the IF 1+1 protection groups for
NE11 to NE15.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE11 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE11

Working Mode HSB

Revertive Mode Revertive mode

WTR Time(s) 600

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 96


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter Value

NE11

Enable Reverse Switching Disabled

Working Board 3-ISU2

Protection Board 5-ISU2

Alarm Report Mode Only Protection group alarms

Anti-jitter Time(s) 300

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE12

Working Mode HSB

Revertive Mode Revertive mode

WTR Time(s) 600

Enable Reverse Switching Disabled

Working Board 3-ISU2

Protection Board 5-ISU2

Alarm Report Mode Only Protection group alarms

Anti-jitter Time(s) 300

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE13 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE13

Working Mode HSB HSB

Revertive Mode Revertive mode Revertive mode

WTR Time(s) 600 600

Enable Reverse Switching Disabled Disabled

Working Board 3-ISU2 4-ISU2

Protection Board 5-ISU2 6-ISU2

Alarm Report Mode Only Protection group Only Protection group


alarms alarms

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 97


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter Value

NE13

Anti-jitter Time(s) 300 300

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE14

Working Mode HSB

Revertive Mode Revertive mode

WTR Time(s) 600

Enable Reverse Switching Disabled

Working Board 3-ISU2

Protection Board 5-ISU2

Alarm Report Mode Only Protection group alarms

Anti-jitter Time(s) 300

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE15 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE15

Working Mode HSB

Revertive Mode Revertive mode

WTR Time(s) 600

Enable Reverse Switching Disabled

Working Board 4-ISU2

Protection Board 6-ISU2

Alarm Report Mode Only Protection group alarms

Anti-jitter Time(s) 300

Step 2 See A.3.4 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link and configure the IF/ODU
information of the radio link.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE11 are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 98


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter Value

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

Link ID 101

IF Service Type Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

IF Channel Bandwidth 28M

AM Enable Status Enabled

Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM QPSK


Capacity

Modulation Mode of the Full AM 128QAM


Capacity

Enable E1 Priority Enabled

Guarantee E1 Capacity 3

Full E1 Capacity 5

TX Frequency(MHz) 14930

T/R Spacing(MHz) 420

TX Power(dBm) 16.5

Power to Be Received(dBm) -46

TX Status unmute

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

Link ID 101

IF Service Type Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

IF Channel Bandwidth 28M

AM Enable Status Enabled

Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM QPSK


Capacity

Modulation Mode of the Full AM 128QAM


Capacity

Enable E1 Priority Enabled

Guarantee E1 Capacity 3

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 99


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter Value

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

Full E1 Capacity 5

TX Frequency(MHz) 14510

T/R Spacing(MHz) 420

TX Power(dBm) 16.5

Power to Be Received(dBm) -46

TX Status unmute

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE13 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU 4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

Link ID 102 103

IF Service Type Hybrid(Native E1+ETH) Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

IF Channel Bandwidth 14M 14M

AM Enable Status Enabled Enabled

Modulation Mode of the QPSK QPSK


Guarantee AM Capacity

Modulation Mode of the 32QAM 64QAM


Full AM Capacity

Enable E1 Priority Enabled Enabled

Guarantee E1 Capacity 1 2

Full E1 Capacity 1 4

TX Frequency(MHz) 14532 14547

T/R Spacing(MHz) 420 420

TX Power(dBm) 16.5 16

Power to Be Received -44 -43


(dBm)

TX Status unmute unmute

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 100


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter Value

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

Link ID 102

IF Service Type Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

IF Channel Bandwidth 14M

AM Enable Status Enabled

Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM QPSK


Capacity

Modulation Mode of the Full AM 32QAM


Capacity

Enable E1 Priority Disabled

Guarantee E1 Capacity 1

Full E1 Capacity -

TX Frequency(MHz) 14952

T/R Spacing(MHz) 420

TX Power(dBm) 16.5

Power to Be Received(dBm) -44

TX Status unmute

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE15 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU 4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

Link ID 104 103

IF Service Type Hybrid(Native E1+ETH) Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

IF Channel Bandwidth 7M 14M

AM Enable Status Enabled Enabled

Modulation Mode of the QPSK QPSK


Guarantee AM Capacity

Modulation Mode of the 32QAM 64QAM


Full AM Capacity

Enable E1 Priority Disabled Enabled

Guarantee E1 Capacity 0 2

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 101


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter Value

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU 4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

Full E1 Capacity - 4

TX Frequency(MHz) 14930 14967

T/R Spacing(MHz) 420 420

TX Power(dBm) 20 16

Power to Be Received -48 -43


(dBm)

TX Status unmute unmute

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE16 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

Link ID 104

IF Service Type Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

IF Channel Bandwidth 7M

AM Enable Status Enabled

Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM QPSK


Capacity

Modulation Mode of the Full AM 32QAM


Capacity

Enable E1 Priority Disabled

Guarantee E1 Capacity 0

Full E1 Capacity -

TX Frequency(MHz) 14510

T/R Spacing(MHz) 420

TX Power(dBm) 20

Power to Be Received(dBm) -48

TX Status unmute

Step 3 See A.6.8.1 Setting IF Attributes and set the IF attributes.


l The values for the relevant parameters of NE11 are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 102


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter Value

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

Enable IEEE-1588 Timeslot Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

Enable IEEE-1588 Timeslot Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE13 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU 4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

Enable IEEE-1588 Disabled Disabled


Timeslot

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

Enable IEEE-1588 Timeslot Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE15 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU 4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

Enable IEEE-1588 Disabled Disabled


Timeslot

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE16 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

Enable IEEE-1588 Timeslot Disabled

Step 4 See A.6.8.2 Configuring ATPC Attributes and configure the ATPC function.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE11 are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 103


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter Value

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

ATPC Enable Status Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

ATPC Enable Status Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE13 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU 4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

ATPC Enable Status Disabled Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

ATPC Enable Status Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE15 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU 4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

ATPC Enable Status Disabled Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE16 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

ATPC Enable Status Disabled

Step 5 A.2.5.1 Creating Optical Fibers by Using the Search Method and create radio links
connections.
The main topology should display all the created radio links.

----End

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 104


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

6.6 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the Hybrid


Radio Ring Network)
This section considers radio links on a Hybrid radio ring network as examples to describe how
to configure radio links according to the network planning information.

6.6.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking information about the NEs.
Based on 5.6 Configuration Example (Hybrid Radio Ring Network), configure the Hybrid
radio links according to the network planning information (as shown in Figure 6-9):
l Each Hybrid radio link transmits E1 services and Ethernet services. The AM function is
enabled on each link.
l To improve transmission reliability of important services, the radio links between NE21
and NE24 are configured with 1+1 SD protection.
l The service capacity accessed by each BTS is provided in Table 6-35.

Table 6-35 Service capacity accessed by each BTS

BTS BTS21 BTS22 BTS23 BTS24

Number of 0 2 0 0
high-priority
E1s

Number of 0 0 0 0
low-priority
E1s

Capacity of 8 4 8 8
high-priority
Ethernet
services (Mbit/
s)

Capacity of 10 10 10 10
low-priority
Ethernet
services (Mbit/
s)

NOTE

High-priority services are guaranteed with sufficient transmission resources and are not discarded even in
the case of an AM switch. Low-priority services are not guaranteed with sufficient transmission resources
and may be discarded in the case of an AM switch. The common service priorities are provided in Table
6-36.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 105


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Table 6-36 Common service priorities

Service Type Service Class

TDM E1s that transmit 2G base station High-priority services


services

ATM E1s (IMA E1s are not used) that High-priority services
transmit 3G base station services

E1s (of a bandwidth not lower than the High-priority service


high-priority service bandwidth) in the
IMA E1 group that transmits 3G base
station services

Other E1s in the IMA E1 group that Low-priority services


transmits 3G base station services

Voice, signaling, and OM Ethernet High-priority services


services

Streaming media, background, and Low-priority services


interactive Ethernet services, for example,
Internet services

Figure 6-9 Networking diagram (Hybrid radio ring network)

Packet
network
201 204
14930M 14958M
14510M 14538M
14M NE21 14M
1+0 1+1
V-polarzation V-polarization

Tx high Tx high
Tx low Tx low
BTS21

Tx low Tx low
NE22 NE24 BTS24
Tx high Tx high
BTS22 202 203
14958M 14930M
14538M 14510M
14M 4E1 14M
1+0 1+0
H-polarization NE23 H-polarzation
BTS23

Link ID
Tx high station Tx Freq.
Tx low station Tx Freq.
Channel spacing
RF configuarion
Polarization

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 106


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

The connections of radio links shown in Figure 6-9 are described as follows.

Table 6-37 Connections of radio links (NE21)

Link Port Description

Between NE21 and NE22 4-ISU2 Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Between NE21 and NE24 3-ISU2 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
SD protection group.
5-ISU2 (standby IF board)

Table 6-38 Connections of radio links (NE22)

Link Port Description

Between NE22 and NE21 3-ISU2 Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Between NE22 and NE23 4-ISU2 Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Table 6-39 Connections of radio links (NE23)

Link Port Description

Between NE23 and NE22 3-ISU2 Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Between NE23 and NE24 4-ISU2 Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Table 6-40 Connections of radio links (NE24)

Link Port Description

Between NE24 and NE21 4-ISU2 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
SD protection group.
6-ISU2 (standby IF board)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 107


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Link Port Description

Between NE24 and NE23 3-ISU2 Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

6.6.2 Service Planning


This section provides the information about all the parameters required for configuring the NE
data.

Basic Information About Radio Links


According to the spectrum allocation on the radio network and the required radio transmission
capacity, you can obtain the basic information about the radio links, as provided in Table
6-41.

Table 6-41 Basic information about radio links

Parameter Link 1 Link 2 Link 3 Link 4

Link ID 201 202 203 204

Tx high site NE21 NE23 NE23 NE21

Tx low site NE22 NE22 NE24 NE24

Tx frequency at 14930 14958 14930 14958


the Tx high site
(MHz)

Tx frequency at 14510 14538 14510 14538


the Tx low site
(MHz)

T/R spacing 420 420 420 420


(MHz)

Channel 14 14 14 14
spacing (MHz)

RF 1+0 1+0 1+0 1+1 SD


configuration
mode

Polarization V (vertical H (horizontal H (horizontal V (vertical


direction polarization) polarization) polarization) polarization)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 108


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

NOTE

The planning information that is not related to the configuration of the IDU (except for the polarization
direction) is not provided in this example.

Hybrid/AM Attribute Information


According to the capacity of E1 and Ethernet services and the availability requirement, you can
calculate the Hybrid/AM attribute information as provided in Table 6-42.

Table 6-42 Hybrid/AM attribute information

Parameter Link 1 Link 2 Link 3 Link 4

Number of E1s 2 2 2 2
in guaranteed
capacity mode

Number of E1s - - - -
in AM full
capacity mode

Capacity of 28 28 28 28
high-priority
Ethernet
services (Mbit/
s)

Capacity of low- 40 40 40 40
priority
Ethernet
services (Mbit/
s)

AM enabling Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

AM guarantee 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM


capacity mode

AM full 128QAM 128QAM 128QAM 128QAM


capacity mode

E1 priority Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled


enabling

NOTE

l In this example, E1 services are high-priority services and therefore the E1 service priority function
does not need to be enabled.
l According to the Hybrid ring protection scheme, each Hybrid radio link must carry all the services on
the ring.
l The Hybrid radio capacity and the AM function require the appropriate license file.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 109


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Power and ATPC Information


By using the radio network planning software such as the Pathloss, you can analyze and compute
the parameters of radio links and obtain the power and ATPC information of the radio links, as
provided in Table 6-43.

Table 6-43 Power and ATPC information

Parameter Link 1 Link 2 Link 3 Link 4

Transmit power 16.5 (NE21) 16.5 (NE23) 16 (NE23) 15 (NE21)


(dBm) 16.5 (NE22) 16.5 (NE22) 16 (NE24) 15 (NE24)

Receive power -42 (NE21) -44 (NE23) -43 (NE23) -45 (NE21)
(dBm) -42 (NE22) -44 (NE22) -43 (NE24) -45 (NE24)

ATPC enabling Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

ATPC - - - -
automatic
threshold
enabling

Upper threshold - - - -
of ATPC
adjustment
(dBm)

Lower threshold - - - -
of ATPC
adjustment
(dBm)

Maximum - - - -
transmit power
(dBm)

NOTE

l The transmit power is calculated in AM guaranteed capacity mode.


l The receive power is calculated in AM guaranteed capacity mode.
l In this example, the ATPC function is disabled.

Information About IF Boards


According to the radio type, slot priorities of IF boards, and configuration rules of the 1+1
protection, you can obtain the information about IF boards, as provided in Table 6-44.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 110


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Table 6-44 Information about IF boards

Parameter Link 1 Link 2 Link 3 Link 4

Main IF board 4-ISU2 (NE21) 4-ISU2 (NE22) 4-ISU2 (NE23) 4-ISU2 (NE24)
3-ISU2 (NE22) 3-ISU2 (NE23) 3-ISU2 (NE24) 3-ISU2 (NE21)

Standby IF - - - 6-ISU2 (NE24)


board 5-ISU2 (NE21)

RF 1+0 1+0 1+0 1+1 SD


configuration
mode

Revertive mode - - - Revertive


(default value)

WTR time(s) - - - 600 (default


value)

Reverse - - - Enabled
switching
enabling

Alarm report - - - Alarm reporting


mode by protection
group

Anti-jitter time - - - 300s (default


value)

NOTE

l It is recommended that you configure the two IF boards that construct the 1+1 HSB protection group in slot
3 and slot 5, slot 4 and slot 6, or slot 1 and slot 2. In addition, it is recommended that you configure the main
IF board in the slot with the smaller slot number.
l It is recommended that you configure the two IF boards that construct the 1+1 FD/SD protection group in
slot 3 and slot 5, slot 4 and slot 6, or slot 1 and slot 2. In addition, it is recommended that you configure the
main IF board in the slot with the smaller slot number.
l In 1+1 HSB configuration, it is recommended that you disable the reverse switching function. In 1+1 SD
configuration, it is recommended that you enable the reverse switching function.
l Unless otherwise specified, it is recommended that alarms be reported by protection group.
l Unless otherwise specified, the other parameters of the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD all take default values.

6.6.3 Configuration Process


This section describes the procedures for the data configuration.

Procedure
Step 1 See A.3.1 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group and create the IF 1+1 protection groups for
NE21and NE24.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 111


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE21 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE21

Working Mode SD

Revertive Mode Revertive mode

WTR Time(s) 600

Enable Reverse Switching Enabled

Working Board 3-ISU2

Protection Board 5-ISU2

Alarm Report Mode Only Protection group alarms

Anti-jitter Time(s) 300

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE24 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE24

Working Mode SD

Revertive Mode Revertive mode

WTR Time(s) 600

Enable Reverse Switching Enabled

Working Board 4-ISU2

Protection Board 6-ISU2

Alarm Report Mode Only Protection group alarms

Anti-jitter Time(s) 300

Step 2 See A.3.4 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link and configure the IF/ODU
information of the radio link.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE21 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU 4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

Link ID 204 201

IF Service Type Hybrid(Native E1+ETH) Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 112


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter Value

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU 4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

IF Channel Bandwidth 14M 14M

AM Enable Status Enabled Enabled

Modulation Mode of the 16QAM 16QAM


Guarantee AM Capacity

Modulation Mode of the 128QAM 128QAM


Full AM Capacity

Enable E1 Priority Disabled Disabled

Guarantee E1 Capacity 2 2

TX Frequency(MHz) 14958 14930

T/R Spacing(MHz) 420 420

TX Power(dBm) 15 16.5

Power to Be Received -45 -42


(dBm)

TX Status unmute unmute

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE22 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU 4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

Link ID 201 202

IF Service Type Hybrid(Native E1+ETH) Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

IF Channel Bandwidth 14M 14M

AM Enable Status Enabled Enabled

Modulation Mode of the 16QAM 16QAM


Guarantee AM Capacity

Modulation Mode of the 128QAM 128QAM


Full AM Capacity

Enable E1 Priority Disabled Disabled

Guarantee E1 Capacity 2 2

TX Frequency(MHz) 14510 14538

T/R Spacing(MHz) 420 420

TX Power(dBm) 16.5 16.5

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 113


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter Value

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU 4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

Power to Be Received -42 -44


(dBm)

TX Status unmute unmute

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE23 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU 4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

Link ID 202 203

IF Service Type Hybrid(Native E1+ETH) Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

IF Channel Bandwidth 14M 14M

AM Enable Status Enabled Enabled

Modulation Mode of the 16QAM 16QAM


Guarantee AM Capacity

Modulation Mode of the 128QAM 128QAM


Full AM Capacity

Enable E1 Priority Disabled Disabled

Guarantee E1 Capacity 2 2

TX Frequency(MHz) 14958 14930

T/R Spacing(MHz) 420 420

TX Power(dBm) 16.5 16

Power to Be Received -44 -43


(dBm)

TX Status unmute unmute

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE24 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

4-ISU2 and 24-ODU 3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

Link ID 204 203

IF Service Type Hybrid(Native E1+ETH) Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

IF Channel Bandwidth 14M 14M

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 114


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter Value

4-ISU2 and 24-ODU 3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

AM Enable Status Enabled Enabled

Modulation Mode of the 16QAM 16QAM


Guarantee AM Capacity

Modulation Mode of the 128QAM 128QAM


Full AM Capacity

Enable E1 Priority Disabled Disabled

Guarantee E1 Capacity 2 2

TX Frequency(MHz) 14538 14510

T/R Spacing(MHz) 420 420

TX Power(dBm) 15 16

Power to Be Received -45 -43


(dBm)

TX Status unmute unmute

Step 3 See A.6.8.1 Setting IF Attributes and set the IF attributes


l The values for the relevant parameters of NE21 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU 4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

Enable IEEE-1588 Disabled Disabled


Timeslot

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE22 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU 4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

Enable IEEE-1588 Disabled Disabled


Timeslot

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE23 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU 4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

Enable IEEE-1588 Disabled Disabled


Timeslot

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 115


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE24 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU 4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

Enable IEEE-1588 Disabled Disabled


Timeslot

Step 4 See A.6.8.2 Configuring ATPC Attributes and configure the ATPC function.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE21 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU 4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

ATPC Enable Status Disabled Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE22 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU 4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

ATPC Enable Status Disabled Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE23 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU 4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

ATPC Enable Status Disabled Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE24 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU 4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

ATPC Enable Status Disabled Disabled

Step 5 See A.2.5.1 Creating Optical Fibers by Using the Search Method and create radio links
connections.
The main topology should display all the created radio links.

----End

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 116


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

6.7 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the Packet


Network)
This section considers radio links on a packet network as examples to describe how to configure
radio links according to the network plan.

6.7.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking information about the NEs.

Based on 5.7 Configuration Example (Packet Network), configure radio links according to
the network plan (as shown in Figure 6-10).

l The AM function is enabled for each radio link.


l To ensure transmission reliability of important services and to increase transmission
bandwidth, the radio links between NE32 and NE33 are enabled with XPIC and configured
with PLA protection.
l The service capacity received by each BTS is provided in Table 6-45.

Table 6-45 Service capacity received by each BTS

BTS BTS32 BTS33 BTS34

Capacity of high- 5 1 4
priority services
(Mbit/s)

Capacity of low- 24 15 4
priority services
(Mbit/s)

NOTE

High-priority services are services that require transmission guarantees. High-priority services cannot be
discarded in modulation scheme shifts. Low-priority services are services that do not require transmission
guarantees. Low-priority services can be discarded in modulation scheme shifts. Table 6-46 lists common
high-priority services.

Table 6-46 Common service priorities

Service Type Service Class

TDM E1s that transmit 2G base station High-priority services


services

ATM E1s (IMA E1s are not used) that High-priority services
transmit 3G base station services

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 117


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Service Type Service Class

E1s (of a bandwidth not lower than the High-priority service


high-priority service bandwidth) in the
IMA E1 group that transmits 3G base
station services

Other E1s in the IMA E1 group that Low-priority services


transmits 3G base station services

Voice, signaling, and OM Ethernet High-priority services


services

Streaming media, background, and Low-priority services


interactive Ethernet services, for example,
Internet services

Figure 6-10 Networking diagram (Packet radio chain network)

303 301,302
14930M 14967M
14510M 14547M
7M 14M
1+0 XPIC
H- polarzation Dual - polarization

Tx low Tx high Tx high


Tx low

BTS33
PLA

NE34
NE33 NE32
BTS34
BTS32 Link ID
Tx high station Tx Freq.
Tx low station Tx Freq.
Channel spacing
RF configuarion
Polarization

The connections of radio links shown in Figure 6-10 are described as follows.

Table 6-47 Connections of radio links (NE32)

Link Port Remarks

Between NE32 and NE33 3-ISX2 (main port in the PLA Uses XPIC and provides
group) PLA protection.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 118


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Link Port Remarks

5-ISX2 (slave port in the NOTE


PLA group) The boards where the main and
slave ports in the PLA group are
located must be installed in two
paired slots.

Table 6-48 Connections of radio links (NE33)

Link Port Remarks

Between NE33 and NE2 4-ISX2 (main port in the PLA Uses XPIC and provides
group) PLA protection.
NOTE
6-ISX2 (slave port in the The boards where the main and
PLA group) slave ports in the PLA group are
located must be installed in two
paired slots.

Between NE33 and NE34 3-ISU2 Receives and transmits


Packet radio services.

Table 6-49 Connections of radio links (NE34)

Link Port Remarks

Between NE34 and NE33 3-ISU2 Receives and transmits


Packet radio services.

6.7.2 Service Planning


This section provides the information about all the parameters required for configuring NE data.

Basic Information About Radio Links


Based on the spectrum allocation on radio networks and the required radio transmission capacity,
you can obtain the basic information about radio links as shown in Table 6-50.

Table 6-50 Basic information about radio links

Parameter Link 1 Link 2 Link 3

Link ID 301 302 303

Tx high site NE33 NE33 NE33

Tx low site NE32 NE32 NE34

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 119


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter Link 1 Link 2 Link 3

Tx frequency at the 32660 32660 14930


Tx high site (MHz)

Tx frequency at the 31848 31848 14510


Tx low site (MHz)

T/R spacing (MHz) 812 812 420

Channel spacing 56 56 7
(MHz)

RF configuration 1+0 1+0 1+0


mode

Polarization V (vertical H (horizontal H (horizontal


direction polarization) polarization) polarization)

NOTE

The link plan (except the polarization direction) that is irrelevant to IDU configuration is not provided in
this example.

Hybrid/AM Attribute Information


According to the capacity of E1 services and Ethernet services and the availability requirement,
you can obtain the Hybrid/AM attribute information, as provided in Table 6-51.

Table 6-51 Hybrid/AM attribute information

Parameter Link 1 Link 2 Link 3

Capacity of high- 5 5 6
priority services
(Mbit/s)

Capacity of low- 21.5 21.5 39


priority services
(Mbit/s)

AM enabling Enabled Enabled Enabled

Modulation scheme QPSK QPSK QPSK


of the assured AM
capacity

Modulation scheme 64QAM 64QAM 32QAM


of the full AM
capacity

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 120


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

NOTE

The Hybrid radio capacity and the AM function are available only if the corresponding license files are
configured.

Power and ATPC Information


By using radio network planning software such as Pathloss, you can analyze and compute various
parameters of the radio links. The power and automatic transmit power control (ATPC)
information about the radio links is provided in Table 6-52.

Table 6-52 Power and ATPC information

Parameter Link 1 Link 2 Link 3

Transmit power 6.0 (NE1) 6.0 (NE1) 20 (NE33)


(dBm) 6.0 (NE2) 6.0 (NE2) 20 (NE34)

Receive power -45.0 (NE1) -45.0 (NE1) -48 (NE33)


(dBm) -45.0 (NE2) -45.0 (NE2) -48 (NE34)

ATPC enabling Disabled Disabled Disabled

Automatic ATPC - - -
threshold setting

Upper threshold of - - -
ATPC adjustment
(dBm)

Lower threshold of - - -
ATPC adjustment
(dBm)

Maximum transmit - - -
power (dBm)

NOTE

l The transmit power is computed in AM guaranteed capacity scheme.


l The receive power is computed in AM guaranteed capacity scheme.
l In this example, the ATPC function is disabled.

Configuration Information About XPIC Workgroups


Table 6-53 provides XPIC configurations of NE32 and NE33.

Table 6-53 Configuration information about XPIC workgroups

Parameter NE32 NE33

XPIC workgroup V (vertical polarization) 4-ISX2 3-ISX2

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 121


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter NE32 NE33

H (horizontal 6-ISX2 5-ISX2


polarization)

Configuration Information About PLA Groups


Table 6-54 provides PLA configurations of NE32 and NE33.

Table 6-54 Configuration information about XPIC workgroups

Parameter NE32 NE33

LAG ID 1 1

Main port 4-ISX2-1 3-ISX2-1

Slave port 6-ISX2-1 5-ISX2-1

Minimum number of active links 1 1

6.7.3 Configuration Process


This section describes the process for the data configuration.

Procedure
Step 1 Follow instructions in A.3.4 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link and
configure IF/ODU information for radio links.

The values for the IF/ODU parameters of NE32 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-ISX2-1 5-ISX2-1

IF Service Type Hybrid(Native E1+ETH) Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

The values for the IF/ODU parameters of NE33 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

4-ISX2-1 6-ISX2-1

IF Service Type Hybrid(Native E1+ETH) Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 122


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

The values for the IF/ODU parameters of NE33 and NE34 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value (NE33) Value (NE34)

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU 3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

Link ID 303 303

IF Service Type Hybrid(Native E1+ETH) Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

IF Channel Bandwidth 7M 7M

AM Enable Status Enabled Enabled

Modulation Mode of the QPSK QPSK


Guarantee AM Capacity

Modulation Mode of the 32QAM 32QAM


Full AM Capacity

Enable E1 Priority Disabled Disabled

Guarantee E1 Capacity 0 0

Full E1 Capacity - -

TX Frequency(MHz) 14930 14510

T/R Spacing(MHz) 420 420

TX Power(dBm) 20 20

Power to Be Received -48 -48


(dBm)

TX Status unmute unmute

Step 2 Follow instructions in A.3.2 Creating an XPIC Workgroup and create XPIC workgroups for
NE32 and NE33.

The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.

Parameter Value (NE33) Value (NE32)

IF Channel Bandwidth 56M 56M

Polarization Direction-V 3-ISX2-1 4-ISX2-1

Link ID-V 301 301

Polarization Direction-H 5-ISX2-1 6-ISX2-1

Link ID-H 302 302

Transmit Power(dBm) 6.0 6.0

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 123


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter Value (NE33) Value (NE32)

Transmission Frequency 32660 31848


(MHz)

T/R Spacing(MHz) 812 812

Transmission Status Unmute Unmute

ATPC Enabled Disabled Disabled

Step 3 Follow instructions in A.3.12 Creating a PLA Group and create a PLA group.

The values for the related parameters of NE32 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

PLA ID 1

Main Board 3-ISX2

Main Port 1-(PORT-1)

Board 5-ISX2

Port 1-(PORT-1)

The values for the related parameters of NE33 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

PLA ID 1

Main Board 4-ISX2

Main Port 1-(PORT-1)

Board 6-ISX2

Port 1-(PORT-1)

Step 4 Follow instructions in A.3.13 Querying the Status of a PLA Group and query the status of the
PLA group.

The values for the related parameters of NE32 and NE23 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

Minimum Active Links 1

Step 5 Follow instructions in A.6.8.1 Setting IF Attributes and configure IF attributes.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 124


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

l The values for the related parameters of NE32 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-ISX2 5-ISX2

Enable IEEE-1588 Enabled Enabled


Timeslot

l The values for the related parameters of NE33 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

4-ISX2 6-ISX2

Enable IEEE-1588 Enabled Enabled


Timeslot

l The values for the related parameters of NE34 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-ISU2

Enable IEEE-1588 Timeslot Enabled

Step 6 Follow instructions in A.6.8.2 Configuring ATPC Attributes and set the ATPC function.
l The values for the related parameters of NE32 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-ISX2 5-ISX2

ATPC Enable Status Disabled Disabled

l The values for the related parameters of NE33 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

4-ISX2 6-ISX2

ATPC Enable Status Disabled Disabled

l The values for the related parameters of NE34 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

3-ISU2

ATPC Enable Status Disabled

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 125


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 6 Configuring Radio Links

Step 7 Follow instructions in A.2.5.1 Creating Optical Fibers by Using the Search Method and
create radio links.
The main topology should display all the created radio links.

----End

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 126


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

7 Configuring TDM Services

About This Chapter

The key to configuring TDM services is configuring the corresponding service cross-
connections.

7.1 Basic Concepts


Before configuring the TDM service, you need to be familiar with the basic concepts.

7.2 Configuration Procedure on a Per-NE Basis


This section describes the procedure for configuring the cross-connections and protection of a
TDM service and the procedure for setting the SDH/PDH port parameters.

7.3 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a TDM Radio Chain Network)


This section considers a TDM radio chain network as an example to describe how to configure
TDM services according to the network planning information.

7.4 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a TDM Radio Ring Network)


This section considers a TDM radio ring network as an example to describe how to configure
TDM services according to the network planning information.

7.5 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a Hybrid Radio Chain Network)


This section considers a Hybrid radio chain network as an example to describe how to configure
TDM services according to the network planning information.

7.6 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a Hybrid Radio Ring Network)


This section considers a Hybrid radio ring network as an example to describe how to configure
TDM services according to the network planning information.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 127


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

7.1 Basic Concepts


Before configuring the TDM service, you need to be familiar with the basic concepts.

7.1.1 Protection Modes for TDM Services


The OptiX RTN 950 supports linear MSP and SNCP for TDM services.

Linear MSP
Linear MSP applies to point-to-point physical networks. Linear MSP provides protection for the
services between two multiplex section termination (MST) modules. That is, when a linear MSP
switching occurs, the services are switched from the working section to the protection section.
In the case of the OptiX RTN 950, linear MSP provides protection for TDM services that are
transmitted over SDH fibers.

Linear MSP is classified into 1+1 linear MSP and 1:N linear MSP.

l 1+1 linear MSP


To realize the 1+1 linear MSP, one working channel and one protection channel are
required. The protection channel does not transmit extra services. When the working
channel becomes unavailable, services are switched to the protection channel for
transmission. Figure 7-1 shows the application of 1+1 linear MSP. According to the
revertive mode, 1+1 linear MSP is classified into dual-ended revertive, dual-ended non-
revertive, single-ended revertive, and single-ended non-revertive modes. The single-ended
non-revertive mode is the most common linear MSP mode.

Figure 7-1 1+1 linear MSP


Working NE B
NE A
channel

Protection
channel

Protection switching

Working
NE A NE B
channel

Protection
channel

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 128


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

l 1:N linear MSP


To realize the 1:N linear MSP, N working channels and one protection channel are required.
The working channels transmit normal services and the protection channel transmits extra
services. When a working channel becomes unavailable, the services on this channel are
switched to the protection channel for transmission. As a result, the extra services
previously transmitted on this protection channel are interrupted. Figure 7-2 shows the
application of the 1:N linear MSP. The 1:N linear MSP is available only in dual-ended
revertive mode.

Figure 7-2 1:N linear MSP

NE A Working NE B
channel 1
Normal Normal
service 1 service1
... Working ...
channel N
Normal Normal
service N service N
Protection
channel
Extra Extra
service service

Protection switching

NE A Working NE B
channel 1
Normal Normal
service 1 service1
... Working ...
channel N
Normal Normal
service N service N
Protection
channel
Extra Extra
service service

SNCP
In the case of subnetwork connection protection (SNCP), the protection subnetwork connection
takes over when the working subnetwork connection fails or deteriorates. In the case of the
OptiX RTN 950, SNCP provides protection for TDM services that are transmitted on STM-1
fiber ring networks, TDM radio ring networks, Hybrid radio ring networks, or hybrid ring
networks that comprise optical network equipment and Hybrid radio equipment.

The SNCP protection scheme, which requires one working subnetwork and one protection
subnetwork, selects one service from the dually transmitted services. In the case of SNCP, the
services are switched to the protection subnetwork for transmission when the working
subnetwork connection fails or deteriorates. Figure 7-3 shows the application of SNCP.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 129


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

Figure 7-3 SNCP

Working SNC

Trail source Trail sink

NE A NE B

Protection SNC

Protection switching

Working SNC

Trail source Trail sink

NE A NE B

Protection SNC

The OptiX RTN 950 supports the coexistence of SNCP and the 1+1 protection or N+1 protection.
In the case of coexistence of the SNCP and the 1+1 protection or N+1 protection, you can set
the hold-off time for SNCP so that the protection switching for the radio link can be performed
first, thus preventing circular switchings.

7.1.2 Timeslots for TDM Services on IF Boards


When TDM services need to be transmitted on a radio link, you need to configure the
corresponding cross-connections between the service timeslots on the service board and the
service timeslots on the IF board. The timeslots for the TDM services on the IF board are closely
related to the type of the radio services transmitted by the IF board and the radio capacity.

TDM Radio
When the IF board works in PDH radio mode and when the radio capacity is nxE1, the first to
nth VC-12 timeslots on the IF board are available and correspond to first to nth E1s that are
transmitted over microwave. For example, if the radio capacity is 4xE1, only the first to fourth
VC-12 timeslots in VC4-1 on the IF board are available. If a cross-connection is configured
between the E1 port of a service board and the second VC-12 in VC4-1 on the IF board, the E1
services that are accessed from the E1 port are sent to the second E1 timeslot that is transmitted
over radio.
When the IF board works in STM-1 radio mode, all the timeslots in VC4-1 on the IF board are
available and correspond to the timeslots in the VC-4 that is transmitted on microwave.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 130


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

Hybrid Radio
When the IF board works in Hybrid radio mode and when the Guarantee E1 Capacity is set to
n in Hybrid/AM Configuration, the first to nth VC-12 timeslots on the IF board are available
and correspond to the first to nth E1 timeslots that are transmitted over microwave. For example,
if the E1 capacity is 75xE1, only the first to sixty-third VC-12 timeslots in VC4-1 and the first
to twelfth VC-12 timeslots in VC4-2 on the IF board are available. If a cross-connection is
configured between the E1 port of a service board and the second VC-12 in VC4-2 on the IF
board, the E1 services that are accessed from the E1 port are sent to the sixty-fifth E1 timeslot
that is transmitted over microwave.

7.1.3 Numbering Schemes for SDH Timeslots


Two numbering schemes for VC-12 timeslots are applicable to SDH optical/electrical lines or
SDH radio links.

VC-12 Timeslot Numbering


Two numbering schemes are applicable to SDH optical/electrical lines or SDH radio links when
you create cross-connections.
l By order
This timeslot numbering scheme is also considered as timeslot scheme. The numbering
formula is as follows: VC-12 number = TUG-3 number + (TUG-2 number - 1) x 3 + (TU-12
number -1) x 21.
This scheme is the numbering scheme recommended by ITU-T G.707 and is the default
scheme adopted by the OptiX equipment.
l Interleaved scheme
This timeslot numbering scheme is also considered as line scheme. The numbering formula
is as follows: VC-12 number = (TUG-3 number - 1) x 21 + (TUG-2 number -1) x 3 + TU-12
number.
The OptiX equipment can adopt this scheme when it interconnects with the equipment that
adopts the interleaved scheme or when a specific timeslot numbering scheme is required.

Figure 7-4 Numbering VC-12 timeslots by order


TUG-2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 4 7 10 13 16 19 1
1
{ 22
43
25
46
28
49
31
52
34
55
37
58
40
61
2
3
1

{
2 5 8 11 14 17 20
TUG-3 TU-12
2 23 26 29 32 35 38 41 2
44 47 50 53 56 59 62 3
3 6 9 12 15 18 21 1
3
{ 24
45
27
48
30
51
33
54
36
57
39
60
42
63
2
3

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 131


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

Figure 7-5 Numbering VC-12 timeslots in the interleaved scheme


TUG-2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 4 7 10 13 16 19 1
1
{ 2
3
5
6
8
9
11
12
14
15
17
18
20
21
2
3
1

{
22 25 28 31 34 37 40
TUG-3 TU-12
2 23 26 29 32 35 38 41 2
24 27 30 33 36 39 42 3
43 46 49 52 55 58 61 1
3
{ 44
45
47
48
50
51
53
54
56
57
59
60
62
63
2
3

VC-3 Timeslot Numbering


A VC-3 timeslot number corresponds to a TUG-3 number. If you need to configure cross-
connections of VC-3s and VC-12s in the same VC-4, note that the timeslots in the TUG-3 that
are occupied by the VC-3 cross-connections cannot be configured for VC-12 cross-connections.

7.1.4 TDM Timeslot Planning Schemes


The timeslot allocation diagram illustrates the TDM timeslot planning scheme.

Timeslot Allocation Diagram


The timeslot allocation diagram provides significant references for configuring TDM services.
Before planning TDM timeslots, you need to be familiar with the meanings shown in the timeslot
allocation diagram.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 132


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

Figure 7-6 Timeslot allocation diagram


Site
NE1 NE2 NE3 NE4
Interface Interface Interface Interface Interface Interface
Timeslot board 2 board 5 board 6
board 1 board 3 board 4
Timeslot 1
Tributary board: Tributary board:
port No. Timeslot 2 Timeslot 4
port No.
Tributary board: Tributary board:
port No. Timeslot 3 port No. Timeslot 5
VC4-1
Tributary board: Tributary board: Tributary board: Tributary board:
port No. port No. port No. port No.

VC4-2 ......

Site area Add/Drop


......
Foward
Timeslot area
Pass-through
Timeslot allocation
Add/Drop (SNCP path)
area

As shown in Figure 7-6, the timeslot allocation diagram contains three areas, namely, site area,
timeslot area, and timeslot allocation area.
The site area contains the NE icons and interface boards that carry radio links.
l The start and end NEs each have only one interface board, which is located under the NE
icon. The intermediate NEs each have two interface boards, which are located at the two
sides of the vertical line under the NE icon. The interface boards may be IF boards or line
boards.
l The interface board on the left side of the vertical line under an NE icon is connected to
the interface board on the right side of the vertical line under its upstream NE icon. The
interface board on the right side of the vertical line under an NE icon is connected to the
interface board on the left side of the vertical line under its downstream NE icon.
l In the case of a ring radio link, before planning the site area, you need to divide the ring
radio link into a chain radio link and ensure that the start and end NEs are the same one.
The timeslot area represents the VC-4 timeslot resources. For example, in the case of radio links,
timeslots occupied by an STM-1 service are all in the first VC-4.
In the timeslot allocation area, each straight line represents a service and the numeric above the
straight line represents the timeslot occupied by this service.
l A black dot indicates that services are added to or dropped from the NE. The board under
a black dot indicates the board and corresponding ports on the board that are used for adding
or dropping services.
l An arrow indicates that services are transferred on the NE.
l If a straight line passes a vertical line without any arrow or black dot, it indicates that
services pass through the NE.
l In the case of protection configuration (for example, 1+1 HSB protection) wherein the
working service and protection service have the uniform route, you only need to draw a

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 133


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

continuous line to represent the working service. In the case of protection configuration
(for example, SNCP) wherein the working service and protection service have different
routes, you need to draw a continuous line to represent the working service and a dotted
line to represent the protection service.

TDM Timeslot Planning Scheme for Chain Networks


On the backhaul network for a mobile BTS, the services are accessed from different nodes and
then aggregated to the same node for transmission. In this case, allocate the timeslots on the
chain radio network as follows:

1. Select the chain that contains the maximum of hops as the main chain. Then, divide the
chain network into several sub-chains by considering the main chain as the reference.
Consider the E1 channels or fiber connections that are used for transferring services
between NEs as links.
2. Allocate the timeslots for the add/drop or pass-through services on the NEs of the main
chain one after another, in the descending order of the NE distance.
3. Repeat the previous step to configure the timeslots for the services on all the sub-chains.

This timeslot allocation method ensures that only the numbers of the timeslots that the services
on the nodes of the aggregation sub-chain occupy may change.

The principles for obtaining the timeslot cross-connection configurations from the non-SNCP
service timeslot allocation diagram are as follows:

l The vertical line under the NE name is considered as the reference.


l If a straight line representing a pass-through service crosses the vertical line, it indicates
that cross-connections are configured between the boards on both sides of the vertical line.
The corresponding cross-connected timeslots are marked over the straight line.
l If there is a straight line with one dot on one side of the vertical line, it indicates that cross-
connections are configured between the board on this side of the vertical line and the board
under the straight line with one dot. The corresponding cross-connected timeslots are
marked over the straight line with one dot.
l If there is a straight line with an arrow on both sides of the vertical line, it indicates that
cross-connections are configured between the two boards on both sides of the vertical line.
The corresponding cross-connected timeslots on each board are marked over the straight
line with an arrow on the side of this board.

For details, see 7.3 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a TDM Radio Chain
Network) and 7.5 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a Hybrid Radio Chain
Network).

TDM Timeslot Planning Scheme for Ring Networks


On a backhaul network for a mobile BTS, the services are accessed from different nodes and
then aggregated to the same node for transmission. Hence, you can perform the following
operations to allocate the timeslots on the SNCP radio ring network:

1. Allocate the timeslots to add/drop services on the NEs in anti-clockwise order. Allocate
the minimum VC-12 timeslot number to the service on the nearest NE. The number of the
timeslot each service occupies does not change on the ring network.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 134


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

2. Repeat the previous step to configure the timeslots for the services on all the sub-chains.

This timeslot allocation method ensures that only the timeslots that the services on the nodes of
the aggregation sub-chain occupy change.

The principles for obtaining the timeslot cross-connection configurations from the SNCP service
timeslot allocation diagram are as follows:

l The vertical line under the NE name is considered as the reference.


l If a straight line representing a pass-through service crosses the vertical line, it indicates
that cross-connections are configured between the boards on both sides of the vertical line.
The corresponding cross-connected timeslots are marked over the straight line.
l If there is a straight line with one dot on one side of the vertical line, it indicates that SNCP
cross-connections are configured between the board on this side of the vertical line and the
board under the straight line with one dot. The corresponding cross-connected timeslots
are marked over the straight line with one dot.

For details, see 7.4 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a TDM Radio Ring
Network) and 7.6 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a Hybrid Radio Ring
Network).

7.2 Configuration Procedure on a Per-NE Basis


This section describes the procedure for configuring the cross-connections and protection of a
TDM service and the procedure for setting the SDH/PDH port parameters.

Figure 7-7 provides the procedure for configuring TDM services.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 135


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

Figure 7-7 Configuration flow chart (TDM services)

Required
Start

Optional
Configuring MSP

Creating TDM service cross-


connections

Configuring the automatic switching


conditions of SNCP services

Modifying the priorities of E1 services

Configuring the overhead bytes

Setting parameters
of SDH port

Setting parameters of PDH ports

Performing PRBS tests for E1


services

End

The procedure in the configuration flow chart is described as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 136


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

Table 7-1 Procedure for configuring TDM services

Step Operation Description

1 A.4.1 Configuring Required when linear MSP is configured for the


Linear MSP optical transmission line.
The parameters need to be set according to the
service planning.

2 Configuri A.5.1 Required when the TDM service is a point-to-point


ng the Creating service.
cross- the Cross- The parameters need to be set according to the
connectio Connectio service planning.
ns of the ns of
TDM Point-to-
servicea Point
Services

A.5.2 Required when the TDM service is an SNCP service.


Creating The parameters need to be set according to the
Cross- service planning.
Connectio
ns of
SNCP
Services

3 A.5.5 Configuring the Optional when the TDM service is an SNCP service.
Automatic Switching
of SNCP Services

4 A.5.3 Modifying the Required when the working source, protection


Priorities of E1 source, or sink of an SNCP service is a link where
Services the AM function and the E1 priority function are
enabled or when the E1 priority of a cross-
connection needs to be changed.
E1 Priority needs to be modified according to the
service planning information.
NOTE
When the radio link on which the AM function is enabled
is configured with the E1 priority, note the following:
l If the cross-connection is configured for a point-to-
point service, the E1 priority is configured when the
cross-connection is created.
l If the cross-connection is configured for an SNCP
service, the E1 priority is modified after the cross-
connection is created.
l If the service priority is not configured when the cross-
connection is created (that is, E1 Priority is set to
None), E1 Priority of each service must be set to a
specific value after the cross-connection is configured.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 137


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

Step Operation Description

5 Configuri A.6.3.1 Required when the J0_MM alarm is generated on the


ng the Configuri local or remote equipment.
overhead ng
bytes RSOHs

A.6.3.2 Required when the TIM or SLM alarm is generated


Configuri on the local or remote equipment.
ng VC-4
POHs

A.6.3.3 Required when the TIM or SLM alarm is generated


Configuri on the local or remote equipment.
ng VC-12
POHs

6 A.6.1 Setting the Optional.


Parameters of SDH
Ports

7 A.6.2 Setting the Optional.


Parameters of PDH l To detect E1 BER performance on the OptiX
Ports RTN 950, set E1 Frame Format of the local E1
port to the same value as that of the opposite E1
port. It is recommended that E1 Frame
Format of both the local and opposite E1 ports
be CRC-4 Multiframe.
l In other scenarios wherein the OptiX RTN 950
is used, it is recommended that E1 Frame
Format take its default value Unframe. If E1
Frame Format is Unframe, the OptiX RTN
950 transparently transmits E1 frames and the
local E1 port allows for interconnection with
another E1 port whose E1 Frame Format is
Double Frame or CRC-4 Multiframe.
NOTE
E1 Frame Format needs to be set to the same value at
both ends of an E1 link.

8 A.14.1 Testing E1 The test results should show that each E1 service
Services Using PRBS contains no bit errors.

NOTE

a: In the case of 1+1 protection configuration or 1+1 linear MSP, you need to configure the TDM service on the
working channel only. In the case of N+1 protection configuration or 1:N linear MSP configuration, you need
to configure TDM services on the working channels and the extra service (if any) on the protection channel.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 138


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

7.3 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a TDM Radio


Chain Network)
This section considers a TDM radio chain network as an example to describe how to configure
TDM services according to the network planning information.

7.3.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking information about the NEs.

Based on 6.3 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the TDM Radio Chain Network),
configure the TDM services according to the following network planning information (as shown
in Figure 7-8):

l To ensure reliable transmission of the services between NE11 and the third-party network,
linear MSP is configured for the optical transmission line.
l Services are transferred between NE12 and NE13 through STM-1 optical ports.

Figure 7-8 Networking diagram (TDM services on a TDM radio chain network)

8xE1
BTS12
STM-1 STM-1
8xE1 NE14 Third party
BTS13
16xE1 network
NE13 NE12 NE11

14xE1 BTS11
8xE1
NE16 NE15

BTS15 BTS14

The connections of TDM links shown in Figure 7-8 are described as follows.

Table 7-2 Connections of TDM links (NE11)

Link Port Description

Between NE11 and the third- 1-SL1D-1 (working port) Configure the ports as a 1+1
party network linear MSP group.
1-SL1D-2 (protection port)

Between NE11 and NE12 3-IF1 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
5-IF1 (standby IF board)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 139


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

Table 7-3 Connections of TDM links (NE12)

Link Port Description

Between NE12 and BTS11 2-SP3S (1-16) Configure the ports to access
services from BTS11.

Between NE12 and NE11 3-IF1 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
5-IF1 (standby IF board)

Between NE12 and NE13 1-SL1D-1 Configure this port to


transmit TDM services.

Table 7-4 Connections of TDM links (NE13)

Link Port Description

Between NE13 and NE12 1-SL1D-1 Configure this port to


transmit TDM services.

Between NE13 and NE14 3-IF1 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
5-IF1 (standby IF board)

Between NE13 and NE15 4-IF1 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
6-IF1 (standby IF board)

Table 7-5 Connections of TDM links (NE14)

Link Port Description

Between NE14 and BTS12 2-SP3S (1-16) Configure the ports to access
services from BTS12 and
Between NE14 and BTS13 BTS13.

Between NE14 and NE13 3-IF1 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
5-IF1 (standby IF board)

Table 7-6 Connections of TDM links (NE15)

Link Port Description

Between NE15 and BTS14 2-SP3S (1-14) Configure the ports to access
services from BTS14.

Between NE15 and NE13 4-IF1 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
6-IF1 (standby IF board)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 140


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

Link Port Description

Between NE15 and NE16 3-IF1 Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Table 7-7 Connections of TDM links (NE16)

Link Port Description

Between NE16 and BTS15 2-SP3S (1-8) Configure the ports to access
services from BTS15.

Between NE16 and NE15 3-IF1 Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

7.3.2 Service Planning


The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for
configuring the NE data.

Timeslot Allocation Diagram


Figure 7-9 shows the timeslots that are allocated for the TDM services according to the service
planning information.

Figure 7-9 Timeslot allocation diagram (TDM services on the TDM radio chain network)
Links-1: NE11 - NE12 - NE13 -NE15 -NE16
Station BSC
NE11 NE12 NE13 NE15 NE16
Timeslot 1-SL1D-1 3-IF1 3-IF1 1-SL1D-1 1-SL1D-1 4-IF1 4-IF1 3-IF1 3-IF1
VC12: 1-8
VC12: 9-22 2-SP3S:1-8

VC12: 23-38 2-SP3S:1-14


VC4-1
VC12: 39-54
2-SP3S:1-16

Links-2: NE13-NE14
Station NE13 NE14
Timeslot 1-SL1D-1 3-IF1 3-IF1
VC12: 23-38 VC12: 1-16
VC4-1
2-SP3S:1-16

Pass through
Add/Drop
Foward

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 141


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

As shown in Figure 7-9, the information about the timeslots that the TDM services occupy on
each NE is as follows:
l E1 services on NE16:
The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to eighth ports on the SP3S board
in slot 2 of NE16.
The E1 services occupy the first to eighth VC-12 timeslots on the link between the first
optical port on the SL1D board in slot 1 of NE11 and the IF1 board in slot 3 of NE16.
l E1 services on NE15:
The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to fourteenth ports on the SP3S
board in slot 2 of NE15.
The E1 services occupy the ninth to twenty-second VC-12 timeslots on the link between
the first optical port on the SL1D board in slot 1 of NE11 and the IF1 board in slot 3 of
NE15.
l E1 services on NE14:
The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to sixteenth ports on the SP3S
board in slot 2 of NE14.
The E1 services occupy the twenty-third to thirty-eighth VC-12 timeslots on the link
between the first optical port on the SL1D board in slot 1 of NE11 and the SL1D board
in slot 1 of NE13.
The E1 services occupy the first to sixteenth VC-12 timeslots on the link between the
IF1 board in slot 3 of NE13 and the IF1 board in slot 3 of NE14.
l E1 services on NE12:
The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to sixteenth ports on the SP3S
board in slot 2 of NE12.
The E1 services occupy the thirty-ninth to fifty-fourth VC-12 timeslots on the link
between the first optical port on the SL1D board in slot 1 of NE11 and the IF1 board in
slot 3 of NE12.

Linear MSP
In this configuration example, no extra services need to be transmitted. Hence, the single-ended
non-revertive 1+1 linear MSP is configured to protect the optical transmission line between
NE11 and the third-party network. Table 7-8 provides the related planning information.

Table 7-8 Linear MSP

Parameter NE11

Protection Type 1+1 Linear MSP

Switching Mode Single-Ended Switching

Revertive Mode Non-Revertive

SD Enable Enabled (default value)

Protocol Type New Protocol (default value)

West Working Unit 1-SL1D-1

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 142


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

Parameter NE11

West Protection Unit 1-SL1D-2

NOTE

Unless otherwise specified, SD Enable, Protocol Type take the default values.

7.3.3 Configuration Process (on a Per-NE Basis)


This section describes the process for the data configuration on a per-NE basis.

Procedure
Step 1 See A.4.1 Configuring Linear MSP and configure 1+1 linear MSP.

The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE11

Protection Type 1+1 Linear MSP

Switching Mode Single-Ended Switching

Revertive Mode Non-Revertive

WTR Time(s) 600

SD Enable Enabled

Protocol Type New Protocol

Mapped Board l West Working Unit: 1-SL1D-1


l West Protection Unit: 1-SL1D-2

Step 2 See A.5.1 Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services and create the point-
to-point service cross-connections.
l The values for the related parameters of NE11 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE11

Level VC-12

Direction Bidirectional

Source Slot 1-SL1D-1

Source VC4 VC4-1

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 143


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

Parameter Value

NE11

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) 1-54

Sink Slot 3-IF1-1

Sink VC4 VC4-1

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) 1-54

Activate Immediately Yes

l The values for the related parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE12

Level VC-12 VC-12

Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional

Source Slot 3-IF1-1 3-IF1-1

Source VC4 VC4-1 VC4-1

Source Timeslot Range 1-38 39-54


(e.g.1,3-6)

Sink Slot 1-SL1D-1 2-SP3S

Sink VC4 VC4-1 -

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1-38 1-16


1,3-6)

Activate Immediately Yes Yes

l The values for the related parameters of NE13 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE13

Level VC-12 VC-12

Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional

Source Slot 1-SL1D-1 1-SL1D-1

Source VC4 VC4-1 VC4-1

Source Timeslot Range 1-22 23-38


(e.g.1,3-6)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 144


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

Parameter Value

NE13

Sink Slot 4-IF1-1 3-IF1-1

Sink VC4 VC4-1 VC4-1

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1-22 1-16


1,3-6)

Activate Immediately Yes Yes

l The values for the related parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE14

Level VC-12

Direction Bidirectional

Source Slot 3-IF1-1

Source VC4 VC4-1

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) 1-16

Sink Slot 2-SP3S

Sink VC4 -

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) 1-16

Activate Immediately Yes

l The values for the related parameters of NE15 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE15

Level VC-12 VC-12

Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional

Source Slot 4-IF1-1 4-IF1-1

Source VC4 VC4-1 VC4-1

Source Timeslot Range 1-8 9-22


(e.g.1,3-6)

Sink Slot 3-IF1-1 2-SP3S

Sink VC4 VC4-1 -

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 145


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

Parameter Value

NE15

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1-8 1-14


1,3-6)

Activate Immediately Yes Yes

l The values for the related parameters of NE16 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE16

Level VC-12

Direction Bidirectional

Source Slot 3-IF1-1

Source VC4 VC4-1

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) 1-8

Sink Slot 2-SP3S

Sink VC4 -

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) 1-8

Activate Immediately Yes

Step 3 See A.14.1 Testing E1 Services Using PRBS and test the E1 services.
Test two E1 services on each BTS. The test results should show that the E1 services contain no
bit errors.

----End

7.4 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a TDM Radio


Ring Network)
This section considers a TDM radio ring network as an example to describe how to configure
TDM services according to the network planning information.

7.4.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking information about the NEs.

Based on 6.4 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the TDM Radio Ring Network),
configure the TDM services according to the service requirements. To ensure reliable

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 146


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

transmission of the services between the BTSs and the third-party network, SNCP is configured
to provide protection for TDM services on the ring network. See Figure 7-10.

Figure 7-10 Networking diagram (TDM services on a TDM radio ring network)

Third party
SDH network 16E1
NE21

4E1
BTS21 4E1

4E1 NE22 NE24 BTS24

BTS22

4E1

NE23
BTS23

The connections of TDM links shown in Figure 7-10 are described as follows.

Table 7-9 Connections of TDM links (NE21)

Link Port Description

Between NE21 and the third- 2-SP3S (1-16) Configure the ports to
party network transmit TDM services.

Between NE21 and NE22 4-IF1 Configure the ports as east


ports.

Between NE21 and NE24 3-IF1 (main IF board of a 1+1 Configure the ports as west
SD protection group) ports.

5-IF1 (standby IF board of a


1+1 SD protection group)

Table 7-10 Connections of TDM links (NE22)

Link Port Description

Between NE22 and BTS21 2-SP3S (1-8) Configure the ports to access
services from BTS21 and
Between NE22 and BTS22 BTS22.

Between NE22 and NE21 3-IF1 Configure the ports as west


ports.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 147


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

Link Port Description

Between NE22 and NE23 4-IF1 Configure this port as an east


port.

Table 7-11 Connections of TDM links (NE23)

Link Port Description

Between NE23 and BTS23 2-SP3S (1-4) Configure the ports to access
services from BTS23.

Between NE23 and NE22 3-IF1 Configure this port as a west


port.

Between NE23 and NE24 4-IF1 Configure this port as an east


port.

Table 7-12 Connections of TDM links (NE24)

Link Port Description

Between NE24 and BTS24 2-SP3S (1-4) Configure the ports to access
services from BTS24.

Between NE24 and NE21 4-IF1 (main IF board of a 1+1 Configure the ports as east
SD protection group) ports.

6-IF1 (standby IF board of a


1+1 SD protection group)

Between NE24 and NE23 3-IF1 Configure this port as a west


port.

7.4.2 Service Planning


The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for
configuring the NE data.

Timeslot Allocation Diagram


Figure 7-11 shows the timeslots that are allocated for the TDM services according to the service
planning information.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 148


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

Figure 7-11 Timeslot allocation diagram (TDM service on the TDM radio ring network)
Station NE22
NE21 NE23 NE24 NE21
Timeslot 4-IF1 3-IF1 4-IF1 3-IF1 4-IF1 3-IF1 4-IF1 3-IF1
VC12: 1-8 VC12: 1-8
2-SP3S:1-8 2-SP3S:1-8 2-SP3S:1-8 2-SP3S:1-8
VC12: 9-12 VC12: 9-12
VC4-1 2-SP3S:9-12 2-SP3S:1-4 2-SP3S:1-4 2-SP3S:9-12
VC12: 13-16 VC12: 13-16
2-SP3S:13-16 2-SP3S:1-4 2-SP3S:1-4 2-SP3S:13-16

Pass through (SNCP working path)


Pass through (SNCP protection path)
Add/Drop (SNCP working path)
Add/Drop (SNCP protection path)

As shown in Figure 7-11, the information about the timeslots that the TDM services occupy on
each NE is as follows:
l E1 services on NE22:
The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to eighth ports on the SP3S board
in slot 2 of NE22.
The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to eighth ports on the SP3S board
in slot 2 of NE21.
The E1 services occupy the first to eighth VC-12 timeslots on the ring.
l E1 services on NE23:
The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to fourth ports on the SP3S board
in slot 2 of NE23.
The E1 services are added to or dropped from the ninth to twelfth ports on the SP3S
board in slot 2 of NE21.
The E1 services occupy the ninth to twelfth VC-12 timeslots on the ring.
l E1 services on NE24:
The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to fourth ports on the SP3S board
in slot 2 of NE24.
The E1 services are added to or dropped from the thirteenth to sixteenth ports on the
SP3S board in slot 2 of NE21.
The E1 services occupy the thirteenth to sixteenth VC-12 timeslots on the ring.

SNCP
Table 7-13 provides the information about SNCP.

Table 7-13 SNCP

Parameter Value

Working Source See the timeslot allocation diagram.

Protection Source See the timeslot allocation diagram.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 149


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

Parameter Value

Revertive Mode Revertive

WTR Time 600s (default value)

Hold-Off Time 0 (default value)

Switching Condition Necessary conditions for an SNCP switching (default


values)

NOTE

Unless otherwise specified, WTR Time, Hold-Off Time, and Switching Condition take the default values.

7.4.3 Configuration Process (on a Per-NE Basis)


This section describes the process for the data configuration on a per-NE basis.

Procedure
Step 1 See A.5.2 Creating Cross-Connections of SNCP Services and configure the SNCP service
cross-connections.
l The values for the related parameters of NE21 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE21

Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional

Level VC-12 VC-12

Hold-off Time(100ms) 0 0

Revertive Mode Revertive Revertive

WTR Time(s) 600 600

Source Slot 4-IF1-1 (working service) 3-IF1-1 (working service)


3-IF1-1 (protection service) 4-IF1-1 (protection service)

Source VC4 VC4-1 (working service) VC4-1 (working service)


VC4-1 (protection service) VC4-1 (protection service)

Source Timeslot Range 1-12 13-16


(e.g.1,3-6)

Sink Slot 2-SP3S 2-SP3S

Sink VC4 - -

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1-12 13-16


1,3-6)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 150


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

l The values for the related parameters of NE22 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE22

Direction Bidirectional

Level VC-12

Hold-off Time(100ms) 0

Revertive Mode Revertive

WTR Time(s) 600

Source Slot 3-IF1-1 (working service)


4-IF1-1 (protection service)

Source VC4 VC4-1 (working service)


VC4-1 (protection service)

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) 1-8

Sink Slot 2-SP3S

Sink VC4 -

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) 1-8

l The values for the related parameters of NE23 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE23

Direction Bidirectional

Level VC-12

Hold-off Time(100ms) 0

Revertive Mode Revertive

WTR Time(s) 600

Source Slot 3-IF1-1 (working service)


4-IF1-1 (protection service)

Source VC4 VC4-1 (working service)


VC4-1 (protection service)

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) 9-12

Sink Slot 2-SP3S

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 151


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

Parameter Value

NE23

Sink VC4 -

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) 1-4

l The values for the related parameters of NE24 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE24

Direction Bidirectional

Level VC-12

Hold-off Time(100ms) 0

Revertive Mode Revertive

WTR Time(s) 600

Source Slot 4-IF1-1 (working service)


3-IF1-1 (protection service)

Source VC4 VC4-1 (working service)


VC4-1 (protection service)

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) 13-16

Sink Slot 2-SP3S

Sink VC4 -

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) 1-4

Step 2 See A.5.1 Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services and configure the
service cross-connections on NE22, NE23, and NE24.
l The values for the related parameters of NE22 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE22

Level VC-12

Direction Bidirectional

Source Slot 3-IF1-1

Source VC4 VC4-1

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) 9-16

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 152


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

Parameter Value

NE22

Sink Slot 4-IF1-1

Sink VC4 VC4-1

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) 9-16

Activate Immediately Yes

l The values for the related parameters of NE23 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE23

Level VC-12

Direction Bidirectional

Source Slot 3-IF1-1

Source VC4 VC4-1

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) 1-8,13-16

Sink Slot 4-IF1-1

Sink VC4 VC4-1

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) 1-8,13-16

Activate Immediately Yes

l The values for the related parameters of NE24 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE24

Level VC-12

Direction Bidirectional

Source Slot 3-IF1-1

Source VC4 VC4-1

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) 1-12

Sink Slot 4-IF1-1

Sink VC4 VC4-1

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) 1-12

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 153


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

Parameter Value

NE24

Activate Immediately Yes

Step 3 See A.14.1 Testing E1 Services Using PRBS and test the E1 services.
Test two E1 services on each BTS. The test results should show that the E1 services contain no
bit errors.

----End

7.5 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a Hybrid


Radio Chain Network)
This section considers a Hybrid radio chain network as an example to describe how to configure
TDM services according to the network planning information.

7.5.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking information about the NEs.

Based on 6.5 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the Hybrid Radio Chain Network),
configure the TDM services according to the following network planning information (as shown
in Figure 7-12):

l Services are transferred between NE12 and NE13 through E1 channels.


l The service capacity accessed by each BTS is provided in Table 7-14.

Table 7-14 Service capacity accessed by each BTS

BTS BTS13 BTS14

Number of high-priority E1 1 2
services

Number of low-priority E1 0 2
services

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 154


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

Figure 7-12 Networking diagram (TDM services on a Hybrid radio chain network)

Packet
E1 network
1xE1 NE14
BTS13
NE13 NE12 NE11

4xE1

NE16 NE15
BTS14

The connections of TDM links shown in Figure 7-12 are described as follows.

Table 7-15 Connections of TDM links (NE11)

Link Port Description

Between NE11 and the PSN 1-SP3S-1 (1-5) Configure the ports to
transmit TDM services.

Between NE11 and NE12 3-ISU2 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
5-ISU2 (standby IF board)

Table 7-16 Connections of TDM links (NE12)

Link Port Description

Between NE12 and NE11 3-ISU2 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
5-ISU2 (standby IF board)

Between NE12 and NE13 2-SP3S (1-5) Configure the ports to


transmit TDM services.

Table 7-17 Connections of TDM links (NE13)

Link Port Description

Between NE13 and NE12 2-SP3S (1-5) Configure the ports to


transmit TDM services.

Between NE13 and NE14 3-ISU2 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
5-ISU2 (standby IF board)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 155


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

Link Port Description

Between NE13 and NE15 4-ISU2 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
6-ISU2 (standby IF board)

Table 7-18 Connections of TDM links (NE14)

Link Port Description

Between NE14 and BTS13 2-SP3S (1) Configure the ports to access
services from BTS13.

Between NE14 and NE13 3-ISU2 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
5-ISU2 (standby IF board)

Table 7-19 Connections of TDM links (NE15)

Link Port Description

Between NE15 and BTS14 2-SP3S (1-4) Configure the ports to access
services from BTS14.

Between NE15 and NE13 4-ISU2 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
6-ISU2 (standby IF board)

7.5.2 Service Planning


This section provides the information about all the parameters required for configuring the NE
data.

Timeslot Allocation Diagram


Figure 7-13 shows the timeslots that are allocated for the TDM services according to the network
planning information.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 156


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

Figure 7-13 Timeslot allocation diagram (TDM services on the Hybrid chain radio network)
Links-1: NE11 - NE12 - NE13 -NE5
Station
RNC NE11 NE12 NE13 NE15
Timeslot 1-SP3S 3-ISU2 3-ISU2 2-SP3S 2-SP3S 4-ISU2 4-ISU2

VC12: 1-2
2-SP3S:1-2
VC12: 3-4
2-SP3S:3-4
VC12: 5
VC4-1

Links-2: NE13-NE14
Station NE13 NE14
Timeslot 2-SP3S 3-ISU2 3-ISU2
VC12: 5 VC12: 1
VC4-1
2-SP3S:1

/ Pass through(low/high)
/ Add/Drop(low/high)

/ Foward(low/high)

As shown in Figure 7-13, the information about the timeslots that the TDM services occupy on
each NE is as follows:
l E1 services on NE15
The E1 services are added to or dropped from ports 1-4 of the SP3S board in slot 2 on
NE15.Ports 1 and 2 add and drop high-priority services and ports 3 and 4 add and drop
low-priority services.
The E1 services occupy the first to fourth VC-12 timeslots on the link between the
SP3S board in slot 1 of NE11 and the ISU2 board in slot 4 of NE15. Ports 1 and 2
transmit high-priority services and ports 3 and 4 transmit low-priority services.
l E1 services on NE14
The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first port on the SP3S board in slot
2 of NE14. The E1 services received by NE14 are high-priority services by default,
because the E1 service priority function is disabled on the radio link to which NE14
belongs.
The E1 services occupy the fifth VC-12 timeslot on the link between the SP3S board
in slot 1 of NE11 and the SP3S board in slot 2 of NE13.
The E1 services occupy the first VC-12 timeslot on the link between the ISU2 board in
slot 3 of NE13 and the ISU2 board in slot 3 of NE14.

7.5.3 Configuration Process (on a Per-NE Basis)


This section describes the process for the data configuration on a per-NE basis.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 157


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

Procedure
Step 1 See A.5.1 Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services and create point-to-
point service cross-connections.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE11 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE11

Level VC12 VC12

Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional

Source Slot 1-SP3S 1-SP3S

Source VC4 - -

Source Timeslot Range 1-2,5 3-4


(e.g.1,3-6)

Sink Slot 3-ISU2-1 3-ISU2-1

Sink VC4 VC4-1 VC4-1

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1-2,5 3-4


1,3-6)

E1 Priority High Low

Activate Immediately Yes Yes

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE12

Level VC12 VC12

Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional

Source Slot 3-ISU2-1 3-ISU2-1

Source VC4 VC4-1 VC4-1

Source Timeslot Range 1-2,5 3-4


(e.g.1,3-6)

Sink Slot 2-SP3S 2-SP3S

Sink VC4 - -

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1-2,5 3-4


1,3-6)

E1 Priority High Low

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 158


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

Parameter Value

NE12

Activate Immediately Yes Yes

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE13 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE13

Level VC12 VC12 VC12

Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional Bidirectional

Source Slot 2-SP3S 2-SP3S 2-SP3S

Source VC4 - - -

Source Timeslot 1-2 3-4 5


Range(e.g.1,3-6)

Sink Slot 4-ISU2-1 4-ISU2-1 3-ISU2-1

Sink VC4 VC4-1 VC4-1 VC4-1

Sink Timeslot 1-2 3-4 1


Range(e.g.1,3-6)

E1 Priority High Low -

Activate Yes Yes Yes


Immediately

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE14

Level VC12

Direction Bidirectional

Source Slot 3-ISU2-1

Source VC4 VC4-1

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) 1

Sink Slot 2-SP3S

Sink VC4 -

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) 1

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 159


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

Parameter Value

NE14

E1 Priority -

Activate Immediately Yes

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE15 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE15

Level VC12 VC12

Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional

Source Slot 4-ISU2-1 4-ISU2-1

Source VC4 VC4-1 VC4-1

Source Timeslot Range 1-2 3-4


(e.g.1,3-6)

Sink Slot 2-SP3S 2-SP3S

Sink VC4 - -

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1-2 3-4


1,3-6)

E1 Priority High Low

Activate Immediately Yes Yes

Step 2 See A.14.1 Testing E1 Services Using PRBS and test the E1 services.
Test one E1 service on BTS13 and BTS14. The test results should show that the E1 services
contain no bit errors.

----End

7.6 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a Hybrid


Radio Ring Network)
This section considers a Hybrid radio ring network as an example to describe how to configure
TDM services according to the network planning information.

7.6.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking information about the NEs.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 160


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

Based on 6.6 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the Hybrid Radio Ring Network),
configure the TDM services according to the service requirements. To ensure reliable
transmission of the services between the BTSs and the PSN, SNCP is configured to provide
protection for TDM services on the ring network. See Figure 7-14.The service capacity accessed
by each BTS is provided in Table 7-20.

Table 7-20 Service capacity accessed by each BTS

BTS BTS22

Number of E1s 2

Figure 7-14 Networking diagram (TDM services on a Hybrid radio ring network)

Packet
network 2E1
NE21

BSC

BTS21

2E1 NE22 NE24 BTS24

BTS22

NE23
BTS23

The connections of TDM links shown in Figure 7-14 are described as follows.

Table 7-21 Connections of TDM links (NE21)

Link Port Description

Between NE21 and the PSN 2-SP3S (1-2) Configure the ports to
transmit TDM services.

Between NE21 and NE22 4-ISU2 Configure the ports as east


ports.

Between NE21 and NE24 3-ISU2 (main IF board of a 1 Configure the ports as west
+1 SD protection group) ports.

5-ISU2 (standby IF board of


a 1+1 SD protection group)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 161


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

Table 7-22 Connections of TDM links (NE22)

Link Port Description

Between NE22 and BTS22 2-SP3S (1-2) Configure the ports to access
services from BTS22.

Between NE22 and NE21 3-ISU2 Configure the ports as west


ports.

Between NE22 and NE23 4-ISU2 Configure this port as an east


port.

Table 7-23 Connections of TDM links (NE23)

Link Port Description

Between NE23 and NE22 3-ISU2 Configure this port as a west


port.

Between NE23 and NE24 4-ISU2 Configure this port as an east


port.

Table 7-24 Connections of TDM links (NE24)

Link Port Description

Between NE24 and NE21 4-ISU2 (main IF board of a 1 Configure the ports as east
+1 SD protection group) ports.

6-ISU2 (standby IF board of


a 1+1 SD protection group)

Between NE24 and NE23 3-ISU2 Configure this port as a west


port.

7.6.2 Service Planning


This section provides the information about all the parameters required for configuring the NE
data.

Timeslot Allocation Diagram


Figure 7-15 shows the timeslots that are allocated for the TDM services according to the network
planning information.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 162


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

Figure 7-15 Timeslot allocation diagram (TDM services on the Hybrid radio ring network)
Station NE22
NE21 NE23 NE24 NE21
Timeslot 4-ISU2 3-ISU2 4-ISU2 3-ISU2 4-ISU2 3-ISU2 4-ISU2 3-ISU2
VC12: 1-2 VC12: 1-2
2-SP3S:1-2 2-SP3S:1-2 2-SP3S:1-2 2-SP3S:1-2

Pass through (SNCP working path)


Pass through (SNCP protection path)
Add/Drop (SNCP working path)
Add/Drop (SNCP protection path)

As shown in Figure 7-15, the information about the timeslots that the TDM services occupy on
each NE is as follows:
l The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to second ports on the SP3S board
in slot 2 of NE22.
l The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to second ports on the SP3S board
in slot 2 of NE21.
l The E1 services occupy the first to second VC-12 timeslots on the ring.

SNCP
Table 7-25 provides the information about SNCP.

Table 7-25 SNCP

Parameter Value

Working Source See the timeslot allocation diagram.

Protection Source See the timeslot allocation diagram.

Revertive Mode Revertive

WTR Time 600s (default value)

Hold-Off Time 0 (default value)

Switching Condition Necessary conditions for an SNCP switching (default


values)

NOTE

Unless otherwise specified, WTR Time, Hold-Off Time, and Switching Condition take the default values.

7.6.3 Configuration Process


This section describes the process for the data configuration on a per-NE basis.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 163


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

Procedure
Step 1 See A.5.2 Creating Cross-Connections of SNCP Services and configure the SNCP service
cross-connections.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE21 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE21

Direction Bidirectional

Level VC-12

Hold-off Time(100ms) 0

Revertive Mode Revertive

WTR Time(s) 600

Source Slot 4-ISU2-1 (working service)


3-ISU2-1 (protection service)

Source VC4 VC4-1 (working service)


VC4-1 (protection service)

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) 1-2

Sink Slot 2-SP3S

Sink VC4 -

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) 1-2

E1 Priority -

Activate Immediately Yes

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE22 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE22

Direction Bidirectional

Level VC-12

Hold-off Time(100ms) 0

Revertive Mode Revertive

WTR Time(s) 600

Source Slot 3-ISU2-1 (working service)


4-ISU2-1 (protection service)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 164


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

Parameter Value

NE22

Source VC4 VC4-1 (working service)


VC4-1 (protection service)

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) 1-2

Sink Slot 2-SP3S

Sink VC4 -

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) 1-2

E1 Priority -

Activate Immediately Yes

Step 2 See A.5.1 Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services and configure the
service cross-connections on NE23 and NE24.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE23 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE23

Level VC-12

Direction Bidirectional

Source Slot 3-ISU2-1

Source VC4 VC4-1

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) 1-2

Sink Slot 4-ISU2-1

Sink VC4 VC4-1

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) 1-2

Priority -

Activate Immediately Yes

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE24 are provided as follows.

Parameter Value

NE24

Level VC-12

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 165


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 7 Configuring TDM Services

Parameter Value

NE24

Direction Bidirectional

Source Slot 3-ISU2-1

Source VC4 VC4-1

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) 1-2

Sink Slot 4-ISU2-1

Sink VC4 VC4-1

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) 1-2

Priority -

Activate Immediately Yes

Step 3 See A.14.1 Testing E1 Services Using PRBS and test the E1 services.
Test one E1 service on BTS22. The test results should show that the E1 services contain no bit
error.

----End

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 166


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the


Packet Plane

About This Chapter

Native Ethernet services on the packet plane include Native E-Line services and Native E-LAN
services.

8.1 Basic Concepts


Before configuring the Ethernet services, you need to be familiar with the basic concepts.
8.2 Configuration Procedure
The service configuration procedure differs according to the specific service type.
8.3 Configuration Example (Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-Line Services)
This section considers a point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service as an example
to describe how to configure the Ethernet service according to the network planning information.
8.4 Configuration Example (VLAN-Based E-Line Service)
This section considers a VLAN-based E-line service as an example to describe how to configure
the Ethernet service according to the network planning information.
8.5 Configuration Example (QinQ-Based E-Line Service)
This section considers a QinQ-based E-line service as an example to describe how to configure
the Ethernet service according to the network planning information.
8.6 Configuration Example (802.1d-Bridge-Based E-LAN Service)
This section considers an 802.1d-bridge-based E-LAN service as an example to describe how
to configure the Ethernet service according to the network planning information.
8.7 Configuration Example (802.1q-Bridge-Based E-LAN Service)
This section considers an 802.1q-bridge-based E-LAN service as an example to describe how
to configure the Ethernet service according to the network planning information.
8.8 Configuration Example (802.1ad-Bridge-Based E-LAN Service)
This section considers an 802.1ad-bridge-based E-LAN service as an example to describe how
to configure the Ethernet service according to the network planning information.
8.9 Configuration Example (Hybrid Configuration of E-Line Services and E-LAN Services)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 167


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

This section describes how to configure a radio network that transmits E-Line services and E-
LAN services at the same time according to the network planning information.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 168


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

8.1 Basic Concepts


Before configuring the Ethernet services, you need to be familiar with the basic concepts.

8.1.1 What's the Packet Plane


The packet plane refers to the switching plane provided by the packet switching unit on a system
control, switching, and timing board. The packet plane supports a wide range of services and
features based on Native Ethernet, as well as a wide range of services and features based on
MPLS/PWE3.

As shown in Figure 8-1, the ports connecting to the packet plane are classified into the following
types:

l FE/GE ports on an Ethernet interface board


In the receive direction, the Ethernet switching unit on an Ethernet interface board adds
port tags to the packets received from its FE/GE ports. Then, the packets are converged to
the internal GE ports on the board, and then transmitted to the packet switching unit. The
packet switching unit processes the packets of each port based on the port tags. In the
transmit direction, the packet switching unit adds the port tags to the packets. Then, the
packets are transmitted to the Ethernet switching unit through the internal GE ports on the
board. The Ethernet switching unit transmits the packets to the ports based on the port tags.
Therefore, the FE/GE ports on the Ethernet interface board can be regarded as being directly
connected to the packet switching unit.
l IF_ETH ports on a general IF board or general XPIC IF board
IF_ETH ports are internal GE ports on a general IF board or general XPIC IF board. Ethernet
packets are transmitted to the local IF board through its IF_ETH ports, and then mapped
into Integrated IP radio frames. Ethernet packets demapped from Integrated IP radio frames
are transmitted to the packet switching unit through IF_ETH ports.
The main differences between an IF_ETH port and an FE/GE port are as follows:
An IF_ETH port is an internal Ethernet port. It transmits and receives MAC frames and
does not have PHY-layer functions.
The bandwidth at an IF_ETH port is equal to the Ethernet service bandwidth that the
Integrated IP radio supports. Therefore, when the AM function is enabled in the case
of Integrated IP radio, the bandwidth at an IF_ETH port changes according to the
modulation scheme.
NOTE

Since an IF port corresponds to an IF_ETH port, the IF ports or the microwave ports corresponding to IF
ports can be regarded as being directly connected to the packet plane.
l Bridging port (PORT 10) connecting to the packet plane on the EFP8 board
The EFP8 board has two bridging ports: PORT 9 and PORT 10.
PORT 9 and PORT 10 are two back-to-back internal GE ports, having no PHY-layer
function.
PORT 10 is connected to the packet plane. The Ethernet services on the packet plane
are transmitted to the EoPDH plane through PORT 10.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 169


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

PORT 9 is connected to the EoPDH plane. The Ethernet services on the packet plane
are transmitted to the FE port or VCTRUNK port on the EFP8 board through PORT 9.
l Bridging port (PORT 8) connecting to the packet plane on the EMS6 board
The EMS6 board has two bridging ports: PORT 7 and PORT 8.
PORT 7 and PORT 8 are two back-to-back internal GE ports, having no PHY-layer
function.
PORT 8 is connected to the packet plane. The Ethernet services on the packet plane are
transmitted to the EoS plane through PORT 8.
PORT 7 is connected to the EoS plane. The Ethernet services on the packet plane are
transmitted to the FE port, GE port, or VCTRUNK port on the EMS6 board through
PORT 7.

Figure 8-1 Packet plane


System control, switching,
Packet plane and timing board

Ethernet interface board General IF board or


FE/GE PORT1 general XPIC IF board
IF_ETH IF
Ethernet

switching IF unit
FE/GE PORTn unit GE GE

Ethernet interface board Packet General IF board or


FE/GE PORT1 switching unit general XPIC IF board
IF_ETH IF
Ethernet

switching IF unit
FE/GE PORTn unit GE GE

EFP8
PORT10 PORT9
Ethernet EoPDH plane
GE switching unit
GE

EMS6
PORT8 PORT7
Ethernet
GE switching unit EoS plane
GE

8.1.2 Ethernet Port Numbers


On the NMS, Ethernet ports are represented by PORTs.
l For the EM6F/EM6FA, PORT1 and PORT2 represent GE1 and GE2 respectively; PORT3
to PORT6 represent FE1 to FE4 respectively.
l For the EM6T/EM6TA, PORT1 and PORT2 represent GE1 and GE2 respectively; PORT3
to PORT6 represent FE1 to FE4 respectively.

8.1.3 Auto-Negotiation
The auto-negotiation function allows the network equipment to send information about its
supported working mode to the opposite end of the network and to receive corresponding
information that the opposite end may transfer.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 170


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Auto-Negotiation Function of FE Electrical Ports


FE electrical ports may work in four common working modes: 10M half-duplex, 10M full-
duplex, 100M half-duplex, and 100M full-duplex. If the working modes of the local FE electrical
port and the opposite FE electrical port do not match, the two ports cannot communicate with
each other. Auto-negotiation effectively resolves this problem. Auto-negotiation uses fast link
pulses and normal link pulses to transfer negotiation information about the working mode; lastly,
the working modes of the FE electrical ports match at both ends.

Table 8-1 lists auto-negotiation rules for FE electrical ports.

Table 8-1 Auto-negotiation rules for FE electrical ports (when the local FE electrical port works
in auto-negotiation mode)

Working Mode of the Opposite FE Auto-Negotiation Result


Electrical Port

Auto-negotiation 100M full-duplex

10M half-duplex 10M half-duplex

10M full-duplex 10M half-duplex

100M half-duplex 100M half-duplex

100M full-duplex 100M half-duplex

NOTE

As provided in Table 8-1, when the opposite FE electrical port works in 10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex
mode, auto-negotiation does not necessarily achieve full matching between the working modes of the FE
electrical ports at both ends. As a result, some packets are lost. Therefore, when the opposite FE electrical port
works in 10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex mode, set the working mode of the local FE electrical port to
10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex.

When the FE electrical ports at both ends work in auto-negotiation mode, the equipment at both
ends can negotiate flow control.

Auto-Negotiation Function of GE Electrical Ports


GE electrical ports can work in five working modes: 10M half-duplex, 10M full-duplex, 100M
half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, and 1000M full-duplex. Auto-negotiation of GE electrical ports
is similar to FE electrical port auto-negotiation. Table 8-2 lists auto-negotiation rules for GE
electrical ports.

Table 8-2 Auto-negotiation rules for GE electrical ports (when the local GE electrical port works
in auto-negotiation mode)

Working Mode of the Opposite GE Auto-Negotiation Result


Electrical Port

Auto-negotiation (GE electrical port) 1000M full-duplex

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 171


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Working Mode of the Opposite GE Auto-Negotiation Result


Electrical Port

Auto-negotiation (FE electrical port) 100M full-duplex

10M half-duplex 10M half-duplex

10M full-duplex 10M half-duplex

100M half-duplex 100M half-duplex

100M full-duplex 100M half-duplex

1000M full-duplex 1000M full-duplex

NOTE

As provided in Table 8-2, when the opposite GE electrical port works in 10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex
mode, auto-negotiation does not necessarily achieve full matching between the working modes of the GE
electrical ports at both ends. As a result, some packets are lost. Therefore, when the opposite GE electrical port
works in 10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex mode, set the working mode of the local GE electrical port to
10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex.

When the GE electrical ports at both ends work in auto-negotiation mode, the equipment at both
ends can negotiate flow control.

Auto-Negotiation Function of GE Optical Ports


GE optical ports support only 1000M full-duplex working mode. Auto-negotiation of GE optical
ports is used only for negotiating flow control.

8.1.4 Flow Control Function


When the equipment fails to handle the traffic received at the port due to poor data processing/
transferring capability, the line becomes congested. This also causes buffer overflow and
therefore some packets will be discarded. To reduce the number of packets to be discarded, take
appropriate flow control measures.

Half-duplex Ethernet uses a back-pressure mechanism to control flow. Full-duplex Ethernet uses
PAUSE frames to control flow. Currently, half-duplex Ethernet is not widely applied; therefore,
flow control implemented on the equipment is used for full-duplex Ethernet.

The flow control function on the equipment is classified into two types: auto-negotiation flow
control and non-auto-negotiation flow control.

Auto-Negotiation Flow Control


When an Ethernet port works in auto-negotiation mode, use auto-negotiation flow control. The
auto-negotiation flow control modes include the following:

l Asymmetric PAUSE toward the link partner


The port can transmit PAUSE frames in case of congestion but cannot process received
PAUSE frames.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 172


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

l Symmetric PAUSE
The port can transmit PAUSE frames and process received PAUSE frames.
l Both asymmetric and symmetric PAUSE
The port has the following capabilities:
Transmits and processes PAUSE frames.
Transmits PAUSE frames but cannot process received PAUSE frames.
Processes received PAUSE frames but cannot transmit PAUSE frames.
l Disabled
The port does not transmit or process PAUSE frames.
NOTE

On the NMS, the OptiX RTN 950 supports only two auto-negotiation flow control modes: Disabled mode and
Enable Symmetric Flow Control (symmetric PAUSE) mode.

Non-Auto-Negotiation Flow Control


When an Ethernet port works in a fixed working mode, use non-auto-negotiation flow control.
The non-auto-negotiation flow control modes include the following:
l Send only
The port can transmit PAUSE frames in case of congestion but cannot process received
PAUSE frames.
l Receive only
The port can process received PAUSE frames but cannot transmit PAUSE frames in case
of congestion.
l Symmetric
The port can transmit PAUSE frames and can also process received PAUSE frames.
l Disabled
The port does not transmit or process PAUSE frames.
NOTE

On the NMS, the OptiX RTN 950 supports only two non-auto-negotiation flow control modes: Disabled mode
and Enable Symmetric Flow Control (symmetric) mode.

8.1.5 Native Ethernet Service Types Based on the Packet Plane


Based on the packet plane, Native Ethernet services are classified into six types.

8.1.5.1 Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-Line Service


The point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service are the basic E-Line model. Point-
to-point transmission does not involve service bandwidth sharing, service isolation, or service
distinguishing; instead, Ethernet services are transparently transmitted between two service
access points.

Service Model
Table 8-3 describes the point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service model.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 173


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Table 8-3 Point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service model

Service Model Traffic Flow Service Direction Encapsulation Description


Type

Model 1 PORT (source) UNI-UNI Null (source) The source port


PORT (sink) Null (sink) transparently
transmits all the
received Ethernet
frames to the sink
port.

Model 2 PORT (source) UNI-UNI 802.1Q (source) The source port


NOTE PORT (sink) 802.1Q (sink) processes the
In service model 2, incoming Ethernet
ports process the frames based on its
received Ethernet TAG attribute, and
frames according to
then sends the
their TAG attributes.
Therefore, service processed Ethernet
model 2 is not a real frames to the sink
transparent port. The sink port
transmission model processes the
and is not Ethernet frames
recommended.
based on its TAG
attribute, and then
exports the
processed Ethernet
frames.

Typical Application
Figure 8-2 shows the typical application of service model 1.

Figure 8-2 Typical application of service model 1


NE 1 NE 2
Port 1 Port 3 Port 3 Port 1
E-Line E-Line
Service 1 Transmission Service 1
Network
E-Line E-Line
Service 2 Service 2
Port 2 Port 4 Port 4 Port 2

In service model 1, Ethernet service 1 and Ethernet service 2, which carry no VLAN IDs or carry
unknown VLAN IDs, are accessed to NE1 through port 1 and port 2 respectively. Port 1 and
port 2 transparently transmit Ethernet service 1 and Ethernet service 2 to port 3 and port 4,
respectively. Port 3 and port 4 then transmit Ethernet service 1 and Ethernet service 2 to NE2.
Service processing on NE2 is the same as on NE1.

In service model 2, Ethernet service 1 and Ethernet service 2, which carry no VLAN IDs or carry
unknown VLAN IDs, are accessed to NE1 through port 1 and port 2 respectively. Port 1 and
Port 2 process the incoming packets based on their own TAG attributes. Then, Port 1 and Port

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 174


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

2 send Ethernet service 1 and Ethernet service 2 to Port 3 and Port 4 respectively. Port 3 and
Port 4 process the incoming packets based on their own TAG attributes. Then, Port 3 and Port
4 send Ethernet service 1 and Ethernet service 2 to NE2. Service processing on NE2 is the same
as on NE1.

8.1.5.2 VLAN-based E-Line Services


VLANs can be used to separate several E-Line services so that these services share one physical
channel for transmission. These E-Line services are called VLAN-based E-Line services.

Service Model
Table 8-4 shows the VLAN-based E-Line service model.

Table 8-4 VLAN-based E-Line service model

Service Type Service Flow Service Direction Port Service


Encapsulation Description
Mode

VLAN-based E- PORT+VLAN UNI-UNI 802.1Q (source) The source port


Line service (source) 802.1Q (sink) processes the
PORT+VLAN incoming Ethernet
(sink) frames based on its
TAG attribute, and
NOTE
The VLAN ID of the
then sends the
source must be the Ethernet frames
same as that of the with a specific
sink. VLAN ID to the sink
port. The sink port
processes the
Ethernet frames
based on its TAG
attribute, and then
exports the
processed Ethernet
frames.

Typical Application
Figure 8-3 shows the typical application of the VLAN-based E-Line service model. Service 1
and service 2 carry different VLAN IDs. After the two Ethernet services are received at NE1
through port 1 and port 2 respectively, they share the same transmission channel at port 3.

On NE1, port 1 and port 2 process the incoming packets based on their own TAG attributes;
then, port 1 and port 2 send service 1 and service 2 to port 3. Port 3 processes all the outgoing
packets based on its TAG attribute, and then sends service 1 and service 2 to NE2. Due to the
different VLAN IDs, service 1 and service 2 can be transmitted through port 3 at the same time.

NE2 processes service 1 and service 2 in the same manner as NE1.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 175


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Figure 8-3 Typical application of the VLAN-based E-Line service model


NE 1 NE 2
Port 1 Port 1
Service 1 E-Line Service 1
Port 3 Transmission Port 3 E-Line
VLAN ID: 100 Network VLAN ID: 100
Service 2 e Service 1 Service 1 E-Lin Service 2
VLAN ID: 200 E-Lin e
Port 2 VLAN ID: 100 VLAN ID: 100 Port 2 VLAN ID: 200
Service 2 Service 2
VLAN ID: 200 VLAN ID: 200

8.1.5.3 QinQ-Based E-Line Services


S-VLAN tags can be used to separate several E-Line services so that these services share one
physical channel for transmission. These services are called QinQ-based E-Line services.

NOTE
11.1.1.3 PW-Carried E-Line Services describes QinQ-based E-Line services carried by PWs.

Service Model
Table 8-5 shows the QinQ-based E-Line service models.

Table 8-5 QinQ-based E-Line service models

Service Model Service Flow Service Direction Port Service


Encapsulation Description
Mode

Model 1 PORT (source) UNI-NNI Null (source) The source port adds
QinQ link (sink) QinQ (sink) the S-VLAN tag that
corresponds to the
QinQ link to all the
received Ethernet
frames, and then
transmits the
Ethernet frames to
the sink port to
which the QinQ link
is connected.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 176


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Service Model Service Flow Service Direction Port Service


Encapsulation Description
Mode

Model 2 PORT (source) UNI-NNI 802.1Q (source)a The source port only
QinQ link (sink) receives the
QinQ (sink)
Ethernet frames that
carry C-VLAN tags.
After receiving the
Ethernet frames, it
adds the S-VLAN
tag that corresponds
to the QinQ link to
the Ethernet frames
and then transmits
the Ethernet frames
to the sink port to
which the QinQ link
is connected.

Model 3 PORT+C-VLAN UNI-NNI 802.1Q (source)a The source port adds


(source) the S-VLAN tag that
QinQ (sink)
QinQ link (sink) corresponds to the
QinQ link to all the
Ethernet frames that
carry specific C-
VLAN tags and then
transmits the
Ethernet frames to
the sink port to
which the QinQ link
is connected.

Model 4 QinQ link (source) NNI-NNI QinQ (source) The source port
QinQ link (sink) QinQ (sink) transmits the
Ethernet frames that
carry a specific S-
VLAN tag
(corresponding to
the source QinQ
link) to the sink port
to which the sink
QinQ link is
connected. If the
source and sink
QinQ links have
different S-VLAN
tags, S-VLAN tag
swapping occurs.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 177


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

NOTE

a: Set Tag to Tag Aware.

Typical Application
Figure 8-4 shows the typical application of service model 1.

Service 1 and service 2 contain tagged frames and untagged frames. Service 1 is transmitted to
NE1 through port 1, and service 2 is transmitted to NE1 through port 2. Port 1 adds an S-VLAN
tag to service 1, and port 2 adds another S-VLAN tag to service 2. Service 1 and service 2 are
then transmitted to Port 3. Port 3 transmits service 1 and service 2 to NE2.

NE2 processes service 1 and service 2 in the same manner as NE1.

Figure 8-4 Typical application of service model 1


NE 1 NE 2
Port 1 Port 1
E-Line
Service 1 Port 3 Transmission Port 3 E-Line Service 1
Network
Service 2 e E-Lin Service 2
E-Lin e
Port 2 Port 2

Strip S-VLAN Label Add S-VLAN Label Add S-VLAN Label Strip S-VLAN Label

Data( 1) S-VLAN(300) Data(1) S-VLAN(300) Data(1) Data(1)

Data(2) S-VLAN(400) Data(2) S-VLAN(400) Data(2) Data(2)

Figure 8-5 shows the typical application of service model 2.

Service 1 and service 2 carry different unknown C-VLAN tags. Service 1 is transmitted to NE1
through port 1, and service 2 is transmitted to NE1 through port 2. Port 1 adds an S-VLAN tag
to service 1, and port 2 adds another S-VLAN tag to service 2. Service 1 and service 2 are then
transmitted to port 3. Port 3 transmits service 1 and service 2 to NE2.

NE2 processes service 1 and service 2 in the same manner as NE1.

Figure 8-5 Typical application of service model 2


Strip S-VLAN Label Add S-VLAN Label

C-VLAN Data( 1) S-VLAN(300) C-VLAN Data(1)

C-VLAN Data(2) S-VLAN(400) C-VLAN Data(2)

NE 1 NE 2
Port 1 Port 1
E-Line
Service 1
Port 3 Transmission Port 3 E-Line Service 1
Unknown CVLAN Network Unknown CVLAN
Service 2 e E-Lin Service 2
Unknown CVLAN E-Lin e Unknown CVLAN
Port 2 Port 2

Add S-VLAN Label Strip S-VLAN Label

S-VLAN(300) C-VLAN Data(1) C-VLAN Data( 1)

S-VLAN(400) C-VLAN Data(2) C-VLAN Data(2)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 178


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Figure 8-6 shows the typical application of service model 3.

Service 1 and service 2 carry different C-VLAN tags. Service 1 is transmitted to NE1 through
port 1, and service 2 is transmitted to NE1 through port 2. Port 1 adds an S-VLAN tag to service
1, and port 2 adds another S-VLAN tag to service 2. Service 1 and service 2 are then transmitted
to port 3. Port 3 transmits service 1 and service 2 to NE2.

NE2 processes service 1 and service 2 in the same manner as NE1.

Figure 8-6 Typical application of service model 3


Strip S-VLAN Label Add S-VLAN Label

C-VLAN(100) Data( 1) S-VLAN(300) C-VLAN(100) Data(1)

C-VLAN(200) Data(2) S-VLAN(400) C-VLAN(200) Data(2)

NE 1 NE 2
Port 1 Port 1
Service 1 E-Line Service 1
Port 3 Transmission Port 3 E-Line
VLAN ID: 100 Network VLAN ID: 100
Service 2 e E-Lin Service 2
VLAN ID: 200 E-Lin e
Port 2 Port 2 VLAN ID: 200

Add S-VLAN Label Strip S-VLAN Label

S-VLAN(300) C-VLAN(100) Data(1) C-VLAN(100) Data( 1)

S-VLAN(400) C-VLAN(200) Data(2) C-VLAN(200) Data(2)

Figure 8-7 shows the typical application of service model 4.

Service 1 and service 2 carry the same S-VLAN tag. Service 1 is transmitted to NE1 through
port 1, and service 2 is transmitted to NE1 through port 2. Port 1 changes the S-VLAN tag carried
in service 1 and port 2 changes the S-VLAN tag carried in service 2 so that the service 1 and
service 2 carry different S-VLAN tags. Service 1 and service 2 are then transmitted to port 3.
Port 3 transmits service 1 and service 2 to NE2.

NE2 processes service 1 and service 2 in the same manner as NE1.

Figure 8-7 Typical application of service model 4


Switching S-VLAN Label

S-VLAN(100) Data( 1) S-VLAN(300) Data(1)

S-VLAN(100) Data(2) S-VLAN(400) Data(2)

NE 1 NE 2
Port 1 Port 1
E-Line
Service 1
Port 3 Transmission Port 3 E-Line Service 1
S-VLAN ID: 100 Network S-VLAN ID: 100
Service 2 e E-Lin Service 2
S-VLAN ID: 100 E-Lin e
Port 2 Port 2 S-VLAN ID: 100

Switching S-VLAN Label

S-VLAN(300) Data( 1) S-VLAN(100) Data(1)

S-VLAN(400) Data(2) S-VLAN(100) Data(2)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 179


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

8.1.5.4 8021D Bridge-based E-LAN Services


If packets of E-LAN services are forwarded only based on the MAC address table, these E-LAN
services are called 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services.

Service Model
Table 8-6 shows the 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service model.

Table 8-6 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service model

Service Type Tag Attribute Port Logical Port Learning Sub-


Encapsulation Type Mode Switching
Mode Domain

802.1D bridge- Tag- Null PORT SVL No division of


based E-LAN Transparent sub-switching
service domains

Typical Application
Figure 8-8 shows the typical application of the 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service model.
Services A are received at NE2 and NE3, and then transmitted over the transmission network.
These services are finally converged and switched at NE1. The services do not need to be
separated. Therefore, an 802.1D bridge is used at NE1 to groom services.

Figure 8-8 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service model


NE 2

Port 2 Port 1
User A2

NE 1 Transmission
Network

Port 1 Port 2
User A1
Port 3

802.1d bridge NE 3
Transmission
Network

Port 1
User A3
Port 2

8.1.5.5 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services


VLANs can be used to separate several E-LAN services, and then an 802.1Q bridge is divided
into multiple independent sub-switching domains. These E-LAN services are called 802.1Q
bridge-based E-LAN services.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 180


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Service Model
Table 8-7 shows the 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service model.

Table 8-7 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service model

Service Type TAG Port Logical Port Learning Sub-


Attribute Encapsulation Type Mode Switching
Mode Domain

802.1Q bridge- C-Awared 802.1Q PORT+VLAN IVL Sub-switching


based E-LAN domains are
service divided based on
VLAN IDs.

Typical Application
Figure 8-9 shows the typical application of the 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service model.
Services G and H are received at NE2 and NE3, and then are transmitted over the transmission
network. These services finally are converged and switched at NE1. As services G and H use
different VLAN planning, 802.1Q bridges are configured on NEs and sub-switching domains
are divided based on VLANs, differentiating and separating the two services.

Figure 8-9 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service model


NE 2

VLAN 100
Port 1
User G2
Port 3
NE 1
VLAN 200

Transmission Port 2
VLAN 100
Port 1 Network User H2
User G1
Port 3
802.1q bridge
VLAN 200
Port 2 Port 4
User H1 NE 3

Transmission
VLAN 100
Network
802.1q bridge Port 1
User G3

VLAN 200
Port 3 Port 2
User H3

802.1q bridge

NOTE
You can configure 8.1.5.2 VLAN-based E-Line Services on NE2 and NE3 for receiving services.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 181


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

8.1.5.6 802.1ad Bridge-based E-LAN Services


S-VLAN tags can be used to separate several E-LAN services, and then a bridge is divided into
multiple independent sub-switching domains. These services are called 802.1ad bridge-based
E-LAN services.

Service Model
Table 8-8 shows the 802.1ad bridge-based E-LAN service model.

Table 8-8 802.1ad bridge-based E-LAN service model

Service Type Tag Attribute Port Logical Port Learning Sub-


Encapsulation Type Mode Switching
Mode Domain

E-LAN services S-Awared Null or 802.1Q PORT (The IVL Sub-switching


based on (UNI port)a encapsulation domains are
802.1ad bridge mode of the UNI divided based on
QinQ (NNI port)
port is Null.) S-VLAN tags.
PORT or PORT
+C-VLAN (The
encapsulation
mode of the UNI
port is 802.1Q.)
a

PORT+S-
VLAN (NNI
port)

NOTE
a: When the encapsulation mode of port is 802.1Q, set Tag to Tag Aware.

Typical Application
Figure 8-10 shows the typical application of the 802.1ad bridge-based E-LAN service model.
Services G and H are received at NE2 and NE3, and then are transmitted over the transmission
network. These services finally are converged and switched at NE1. As services G and H use
the same C-VLAN planning, extra S-VLAN tags are configured on NEs, differentiating and
separating the two services.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 182


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Figure 8-10 Typical application of the 802.1ad bridge-based E-LAN service model
NE 2

Add S-VLAN Label Strip S-VLAN Label

S-VLAN(300) C-VLAN(100) Data(G) C-VLAN(100) Data( G)

S-VLAN(400) C-VLAN(100) Data(H) C-VLAN(100) Data(H)

NE 2

SVLAN 300
Port 1
User G2
CVLAN 100
Port 3
SVLAN 400
NE 1 Port 2
Transmission User H2
SVLAN 300 Network CVLAN 100
Port 1 Port 3
User G1 802.1ad bridge
CVLAN 100
SVLAN 400
NE 3
Port 2
User H1
CVLAN 100 Port 4 SVLAN 300
Transmission
Port 1
Network
802.1ad bridge User G3
CVLAN 100
SVLAN 400
Port 3 Port 2
NE 1 User H3
CVLAN 100
Strip S-VLAN Label Add S-VLAN Label

C-VLAN(100) Data( G) S-VLAN(300) C-VLAN(100) Data(G) 802.1ad bridge

C-VLAN(100) Data(H) S-VLAN(400) C-VLAN(100) Data(H)


NE 3

Add S-VLAN Label Strip S-VLAN Label

S-VLAN(300) C-VLAN(100) Data(G) C-VLAN(100) Data( G)

S-VLAN(400) C-VLAN(100) Data(H) C-VLAN(100) Data(H)

NOTE
You can configure 8.1.5.3 QinQ-Based E-Line Services on NE2 and NE3 for service access.

8.1.6 Typical Mobile Carrier Network Topologies for Ethernet


Services
Generally, Ethernet services are transmitted in three network topologies on a mobile carrier
network.

8.1.6.1 Networking of VLAN-Based E-Line Services


VLANs can be used to separate E-Line services. With the VLAN technology, multiple E-Line
services can share one physical channel.
On the mobile carrier network shown in Figure 8-11, the VLAN IDs that received BTS services
carry are planned in a unified manner and are unique globally. The BTS services share the
Ethernet service bandwidth on the Hybrid radio network (NE1 to NE5) and are isolated from
each other by means of VLAN IDs. The BTS services are aggregated at NE1 and then transmitted

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 183


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

through the regional backhaul network to the BSC. Therefore, in this example, services on the
Hybrid radio network of the mobile carrier network are configured as VLAN-based E-Line
services.

Figure 8-11 Networking diagram of VLAN-based E-Line services

FE
BTS
VLAN 1 NE3

FE
NE2 Regional
BTS Hybrid microwave transmission network Backhaul Network
VLAN 2 GE
NE1 BSC
FE
BTS
VLAN 3 NE4
NE5
FE

BTS
VLAN 4

8.1.6.2 Networking of IEEE 802.1d Bridge-Based E-LAN Services


In the case of IEEE 802.1d bridge-based E-LAN service networking, data is forwarded based
on MAC addresses instead of VLAN IDs.

As shown in Figure 8-12, the mobile carrier network need not sense whether the received BTS
services carry any VLAN IDs. Services from each BTS are aggregated at NE1 and then
transmitted through the regional backhaul network to the BSC. Therefore, in this example, the
services on the Hybrid radio network (NE1 to NE6) of the mobile carrier network are configured
as IEEE 802.1d bridge-based E-LAN services. The Hybrid radio network checks the destination
ports in the MAC address table according to the destination MAC addresses carried by the BTS
services and then forwards BTS services to the ports.

NOTE

IEEE 802.1d bridge-based E-LAN service packets are forwarded based on MAC addresses and may be broadcast
among all ports connected to the IEEE 802.1d bridge. Therefore, isolate the ports that need not communicate
with each other by adding the ports into a split horizon group.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 184


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Figure 8-12 Networking diagram of IEEE 802.1d bridge-based E-LAN services

FE

BTS
NE3

FE
NE2
Regional backhaul
BTS Hybrid microwave transmission network network GE
NE1 BSC
FE

BTS
NE5 NE4

FE

BTS NE6

Split horizon group

8.1.6.3 Networking of IEEE 802.1q Bridge-Based E-LAN Services


In the case of IEEE 802.1q bridge-based E-LAN service networking, services are isolated by
means of VLAN IDs. That is, the IEEE 802.1q bridge is divided into multiple sub-switching
domains, which are isolated from each other.

On the mobile carrier network shown in Figure 8-13, the VLAN IDs that received BTS services
carry are planned in a unified manner and are unique within each domain. BTS services in
different domains are isolated from each other by means of VLAN IDs and BTSs in the same
domain can communicate with each other. The BTS services are aggregated at NE1 and then
transmitted through the regional backhaul network to the BSC. Therefore, in this example, the
services on the Hybrid radio network of the mobile carrier network are configured as IEEE
802.1q bridge-based E-LAN services. The Hybrid radio network checks the destination ports in
the MAC address table according to the destination MAC addresses and VLAN IDs carried by
the BTS services and then forwards BTS services to the ports.

NOTE

IEEE 802.1q bridge-based E-LAN service packets can be broadcast within each domain. Therefore, isolate the
ports that need not communicate with each other by adding the ports into a split horizon group.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 185


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Figure 8-13 Networking diagram of IEEE 802.1q bridge-based E-LAN services

FE

BTS
VLAN 1 NE3

FE
NE2 Domain 1
BTS VLAN 1 Regional backhaul
VLAN 1 network
Domain 2 GE
VLAN 2 NE1 BSC
Hybrid radio
network

FE

BTS
NE5 NE4
VLAN 2

FE

BTS
VLAN 2 NE6

Split horizon group

8.1.6.4 Comparison Between the Three Networking Modes


The three networking modes differ from each other.

Table 8-9 compares the three networking modes.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 186


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Table 8-9 Comparison between the three networking modes

Networkin Application Scenario Service Service Configurati Network


g Mode Stability Security on Scalability
Applicable Applicable Complexity
Network VLAN ID
Size Allocation

Networking This l The High l Very high l The l The


of VLAN- networking VLAN l Services configurat network is
based E-Line mode is IDs that from ion difficult to
services applicable to received different operations expand.
all network BTS BTSs are are l To add the
sizes. services isolated complex. new
carry are from each l Only VLAN ID
planned in other. point-to- after a
a unified point BTS is
manner configurat added,
and are ion is you need
unique supported to change
globally. . the E-Line
l BTS configurat
services ions on all
share the NEs
Ethernet that the
service new
bandwidt service
hs and are path
isolated traverses.
by means
of VLAN
IDs.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 187


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Networkin Application Scenario Service Service Configurati Network


g Mode Stability Security on Scalability
Applicable Applicable Complexity
Network VLAN ID
Size Allocation

Networking It is l The Medium l Low l The l The


of IEEE recommende network l The configurat network is
802.1d d that the need not service ion easy to
bridge-based network sense packets operations expand.
E-LAN contains less whether can be are l After a
services than 50 BTSs. the broadcast simple. BTS is
received on the l Point-to- added,
BTS entire multipoint you need
services network. configurat not
carry any ion is change
VLAN supported the
IDs. . configurat
l Services ions of
need not other NEs
be on the
isolated network.
between Instead,
different you only
ports need to
connected change
to the the
same mounted
bridge.a ports on
the NE
connected
to the base
station.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 188


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Networkin Application Scenario Service Service Configurati Network


g Mode Stability Security on Scalability
Applicable Applicable Complexity
Network VLAN ID
Size Allocation

Networking This l The Medium l High l The l The


of IEEE networking VLAN l The configurat network is
802.1q mode is IDs that service ion easy to
bridge-based applicable to received packets operations expand.
E-LAN all network BTS are are l After a
services sizes, services broadcast simple. BTS is
especially to a carry are within l Point-to- added in a
network that planned in each multipoint domain,
is divided into a unified domain configurat you need
several manner and are ion is not
domains. and are isolated supported change
unique between . the
within different configurat
each domains. ions of the
domain. other NEs
l The BTS in the
services domain or
from the
different configurat
domains ions of
are NEs in the
isolated other
from each domains.
other by Instead,
means of you only
VLAN need to
IDs. change
l BTS the
services mounted
within a ports and
domain VLAN
need not IDs on the
be NE
isolated connected
from each to the base
station.
other.a

NOTE

a: To block communication between certain ports connected to a bridge, you need to add the ports into a split
horizon group.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 189


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

8.1.7 MAC Address Table Management


Entries in a MAC address table show the mapping between MAC addresses and ports. The entries
can be divided into dynamic entries, static entries, and blacklist entries.

l Dynamic entry
A dynamic entry is obtained by a bridge in SVL or IVL mode. A dynamic entry will be
aged out and will be lost after the Ethernet processing unit is reset.
l Static entry
A static entry is manually added to the MAC address table by a network administrator on
the NMS. A static entry will not be aged out. Generally, a static entry is configured if a
piece of equipment with a known MAC address is mounted to a port and the equipment
has constant heavy traffic. A static entry is not lost after the Ethernet processing unit is
reset.
l Blacklist entry
A blacklist entry is also called a MAC disabled entry or blackhole entry. If the source MAC
address or destination MAC address of a data frame is defined in a blacklist entry, this data
frame is discarded. A blacklist entry is configured by a network administrator. A blacklist
entry will not be aged out, and will not be lost after the Ethernet processing board is reset.
NOTE
An forwarding entry is automatically deleted if it is not updated within a specified period, that is, no new
packet from the MAC address defined in the entry is received to enable the re-learning of this MAC address
within a specified period. This mechanism is called aging, and the specified period is called aging time.

8.1.8 VLAN Forwarding Table for E-Line Services


Generally, the VLAN IDs of VLAN-based E-Line services are not changed. If changing VLAN
IDs is required, configure a VLAN forwarding table.

For VLAN-based E-Line services, the VLAN IDs on the source and sink nodes are usually set
to the same value. If packets carry different VLAN IDs on the source and sink nodes, these
VLAN IDs need to be set for the source and sink nodes of the E-Line services. In addition, you
need to configure a VLAN forwarding table to achieve the switch of VLAN IDs at the source
and sink nodes.

Figure 8-14 shows an application of the VLAN forwarding table. In this figure, service 1 carries
a VLAN ID of 100, and it is transmitted to NE1 through port 1. On a transmission network, the
VLAN ID of service 1 may be in conflict with the VLAN IDs of other services. To avoid this
situation, the VLAN ID of service 1 must be changed to another value before it is transmitted
on the transmission network and then be changed to the original value after it is transmitted out
of the transmission network. Therefore, a VLAN forwarding table is configured at NE1 and
NE2, so that the VLAN IDs of services between port 1 and port 3 can be changed as required.
For service 1, when it traverses NE1, the VLAN ID is changed from 100 to 200 and then changes
back to 100 again at NE2.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 190


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Figure 8-14 Application of the VLAN forwarding table in E-Line services


NE 1 NE 2
Port 1 Port 1
Service 1 Service 1
Transmission
VLAN ID: 100 Port 3 Port 3 VLAN ID: 100
Network e
E-Lin
e E-Lin
Service 1 Service 1
VLAN ID: 200 VLAN ID: 200

VLAN Forwarding Table VLAN Forwarding Table


Source Source Sink Sink Source Source Sink Sink
Interface VLAN ID Interface VLAN ID Interface VLAN ID Interface VLAN ID
Port 1 100 Port 3 200 Port 1 100 Port 3 200
Port 3 200 Port 1 100 Port 3 200 Port 1 100

E-Line Service Information Table E-Line Service Information Table


Source Source Sink Sink Source Source Sink Sink
Interface VLAN ID Interface VLAN ID Interface VLAN ID Interface VLAN ID
Port 1 100, 200 Port 3 100, 200 Port 1 100, 200 Port 3 100, 200

8.1.9 Split Horizon Group


To separate services that are converged and to prevent a broadcast storm resulting from a service
loop, you can configure a split horizon group for the E-LAN services at the specified nodes.
After the configuration, the logical ports in one split horizon group cannot forward packets to
each other.

Figure 8-15 shows a typical application of the split horizon group. NEs on the network are
configured with E-LAN services, and the east and west IF_ETH ports and service access ports
are configured as mounted ports of a bridge. In this case, if a split horizon group is not configured
at NE1, broadcast storm occurs due to a network loop as the east and west IF_ETH ports can
forward packets to each other. If a split horizon group is created at NE1 and the east and west
IF_ETH ports are configured as members of the split horizon group, the east and west IF_ETH
ports do not forward packets to each other. Therefore, a service loop is prevented.

Figure 8-15 Split horizon group

NE1

BSC Split horizon group

BTS

NE2 NE4 BTS

BTS

NE3
BTS

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 191


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

NOTE

l ERPS can prevent a service loop on a ring network. If ERPS is already enabled for a ring network, a split
horizon group is not needed as it may affect ERPS operation.
l On the OptiX RTN 950, only the split horizon group configuration based on physical ports is supported.
Therefore, the logical ports mapped from a physical port are added to the split horizon group automatically.

8.1.10 Protection for Native Ethernet Services


The OptiX RTN 950 supports three protection modes for Native Ethernet services, namely,
Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS), link aggregation group (LAG), and multiple
spanning tree protocol (MSTP).

ERPS
ERPS is applicable to ring physical networks and can provide protection for the E-LAN services
between all the nodes on the ring network. Generally, when a ring network is configured with
ERPS, the RPL node blocks the RPL port on one side so that all the services are transmitted
through the ports on the other side. In this manner, service loops are prevented. If a section of
link fails or an NE becomes faulty, the RPL node unblocks its RPL port so that the services are
switched from the faulty point to the RPL port for transmission. In this manner, protection for
the ring network is achieved.

The Ethernet ring network shown in Figure 8-16 is configured with ERPS. Generally, the RPL
node (NE D) blocks its RPL port that is connected to NE A, and all the services are transmitted
over the link NE A <-> NE B <-> NE C <-> NE D. When the link between NE A <-> NE B
becomes faulty, NE D unblocks the blocked port so that the services can be transmitted over the
link NE A <-> NE D <-> NE C <-> NE B.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 192


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Figure 8-16 Implementation of ERPS

NE A

NE B NE D

NE C

Protection switching

Failure NE A

NE B NE D

NE C

Link

Ethernet service direction

Blocked port

LAG
Link aggregation allows multiple links that are attached to the same equipment to be aggregated
to form a link aggregation group (LAG) so that the bandwidths and availability of the links
increase. The aggregated links can be considered as a single logical link.

As shown in Figure 8-17, the LAG provides the following functions:

l Increased the link capacity

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 193


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

The LAG provides users with a cost-effective method for increasing link bandwidth. The
users obtain data links with higher bandwidths by combining multiple physical links into
one logical link without upgrading the existing equipment. The bandwidth of the logical
link is equal to the sum of the bandwidths of the physical links. The aggregation module
distributes the traffic to different members by using the load balancing algorithm, achieving
the load balancing at the link level.
l Improved the link availability
The links in a LAG provide backup for each other dynamically. When a link fails, another
link in the LAG quickly takes over. This process in which link aggregation starts the backup
link only applies to the links in the same LAG and it cannot be performed on links that are
not in the LAG.

Figure 8-17 LAG

Link 1
Link 2
Ethernet Link 3 Ethernet
packet packet
Link aggregation
group

MSTP
The OptiX RTN 950 supports only the MSTP protocol that uses the common and internal
spanning tree (CIST). The MSTP that uses the CIST can be used as a rapid spanning tree protocol
(RSTP). The RSTP is applicable in case of a network loop. This protocol adopts certain
algorithms to reconstruct a loop network into a loop-free tree network and therefore prevents
Ethernet frames from increasing and cycling in an endless manner on the loop network.

On the OptiX RTN 950, the MSTP is used to prevent a network loop on the access side.

See Figure 8-18. When the user equipment is connected to the OptiX RTN 950 through two
different trails, you can configure the ports on the OptiX RTN 950 that are connected to the user
network into a port group. This port group, together with the switch on the user network, can
run the MSTP. If a service access link becomes faulty, the MSTP enables a re-configuration to
generate the spanning tree topology, providing protection for the user network that is configured
with multiple access points.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 194


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Figure 8-18 Prevention of network loops on the access side

Root Root

Port group

CIST

Blocked Port

8.2 Configuration Procedure


The service configuration procedure differs according to the specific service type.

8.2.1 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Point-to-Point


Transparently Transmitted E-Line Services)
Configuring point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line services in an end-to-end mode
includes configuring the service information, port information, protection information, and QoS
information, and verifying the service configurations.

Configuration Flowchart
Figure 8-19 shows the procedures for configuring point-to-point transparently transmitted E-
Line services in an end-to-end mode.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 195


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Figure 8-19 Configuration flowchart (point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line services)


Required Start

Optional
Configuring Ethernet
ports

Configuring IF_ETH
ports

Configuring LAGs

Configuring E-Line
services

Configuring QoS

Verifying Ethernet
service configurations

End

The procedures in the configuration flowchart are described as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 196


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedure for Configuring Ethernet Ports

Table 8-10 Procedure for configuring Ethernet ports

Operation Description

Setting the A.6.6.1 Required. Set the parameters as follows:


parameters Setting the l In the case of used ports, set Enable Port to Enabled. In
of Ethernet Basic the case of unused ports, set Enable Port to Disabled.
ports Attributes
of Ethernet l Set Port Mode to Layer 2 and set Encapsulation Type
Ports to Null.
l In the case of an Ethernet port that is connected to external
equipment, set Working Mode to be the same value as the
external equipment (the working mode of the external
equipment is generally auto-negotiation). In the case of an
Ethernet port within the network, set Working Mode to
Auto-Negotiation.
l When jumbo frames are transmitted, set Max Frame
Length (byte) according to the actual length of the jumbo
frames. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set Max
Frame Length (byte) to 1536.

A.6.6.2 Required when the flow control function is enabled on the


Configuring external equipment to which the Ethernet port is connected.
the Traffic Set the parameters as follows:
Control of l When the external equipment uses the non-auto-
Ethernet negotiation flow control function, set Non-
Ports Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode to Enable
Symmetric Flow Control.
l When the external equipment uses the auto-negotiation
flow control function, set Auto-Negotiation Flow
Control Mode to Enable Symmetric Flow Control.

A.6.6.5 Optional.
Setting the
Advanced
Attributes
of Ethernet
Ports

Setting the A.6.7.1 Required.


parameters Setting the Set Port Mode to Layer 2 and set Encapsulation Type to
of IF_ETH Basic Null.
ports Attributes
of IF_ETH
Ports

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 197


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Operation Description

A.6.7.4 Optional.
Setting the When the IF_ETH port transmits an Ethernet service that
Advanced permits bit errors, such as a voice service or a video service,
Attributes you can set Error Frame Discard Enabled to Disabled.
of IF_ETH
NOTE
Ports
l For the ISU2/ISX2, it is recommended that you set Speed
Transmission at L2 and Speed Transmission at L3 to
Enabled, if the corresponding permission to enable the two
functions is already obtained.
l When Speed Transmission at L3 is set to Enabled,
Encapsulation Type of the ISU2 and ISX2 boards cannot be set
to Null.
l Members in a PLA group do not support Speed Transmission at
L3.
l Set Speed Transmission at L2 and Speed Transmission at L3
consistently for both ends of a radio link.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 198


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedure for Configuring LAG on Ethernet ports

Table 8-11 Procedure for Configuring LAG on Ethernet ports

Operation Description

A.7.2.1 Required if LAG protection is configured for FE/GE ports or for the
Creating a Integrated IP radio that works in N+0/XPIC mode. Set the parameters as
LAG follows:
NOTE
For ISU2/ISX2 boards, if they have been added to a PLA group during radio link
configuration, the LAG does not need to be configured.
l Set LAG Type to the same value as that at the opposite end. Generally,
set LAG Type to Static at both ends.
l Set the Hybrid/AM attributes to the same values for the IF ports in a
LAG.
l For FE/GE ports, set Load Sharing to the same value as that at the
opposite end. It is recommended that you set Load Sharing to Non-
Sharing at both ends, if the LAG is configured only to provide
protection. It is recommended that you set Load Sharing to Sharing
at both ends, if the LAG is configured to increase the bandwidth.
l Set Load Sharing to Sharing at both ends, if Integrated IP radio works
in N+0/XPIC mode and uses LAG protection.
l Set Revertive Mode to the same value as that at the opposite end.
Generally, set Revertive Mode to Revertive at both ends. This
parameter is valid only to LAGs whose Load Sharing is set to Non-
Sharing.
l Set Load Sharing Hash Algorithm to the same value as for the
opposite equipment. Unless otherwise specified, this parameter takes
its default value Automatic. This parameter is applicable only to load-
sharing LAGs.
l It is recommended that the main and slave ports take the same settings
at both ends. In this case, you can set System Priority as required. It
is recommended that this parameter take its default value. This
parameter is valid only to static LAGs.
l For an air interface LAG, to enable microwave signal degrade to trigger
LAG switching, set Switch LAG upon Air Interface SD to
Enabled.
l Set Main Board, Main Port, and Selected Standby Ports according
to the network plan. It is recommended that the same main and slave
ports are used for the LAGs at both ends.
NOTE
Set the AM attributes to the same value for the microwave ports in a LAG.

A.7.2.2 Setting Optional.


LAG
Parameters

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 199


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedures for Configuring Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-Line


Services

Table 8-12 Procedures for configuring point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line services

Operation Description

A.2.5.1 Perform this task to create radio links if they have not been created on
Creating Main Topology of the U2000.
Optical Fibers
by Using the
Search Method

A.2.5.2 Required when Ethernet services are transmitted over FE/GE links.
Creating Set the parameters as follows:
Fibers
Manually l If FE/GE ports are connected through optical fibers, set Fiber/Cable
to Fiber. If FE/GE ports are connected through electrical cables, set
Fiber/Cable to Cable.
l Set Automatically Allocate Address to No.

A.13.1.1 Required.
Creating E- Set related parameters according to the service planning information and
Line Services parameter planning information.
over Native
Ethernet

Procedure for Configuring QoS

Table 8-13 Procedure for configuring QoS

Operation Description

A.7.7.2 Required if the default mappings for the DS domain are inapplicable.
Modifying the Set the related parameters according to the network plan.
Mapping
Relationships You can learn the default mappings for the DS domain by referring to A.
for the DS 7.7.10 Querying the DS Domain of a Port.
Domain

A.7.7.3 Required if the trusted packet type of the port is different from the default
Changing the trusted packet type (C-VLAN priority) applied to the DS domain.
Ports Applied Set the related parameters according to the network plan.
to a DS Domain
and Their
Trusted Packet
Types

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 200


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Operation Description

A.7.7.1 Required if you need to create more than one DS domain.


Creating a DS Set the related parameters according to the network plan.
Domain

A.7.7.4 Required if you need to apply QoS policies other than DS and port shaping
Creating a Port for a specific port.
Policy Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

A.7.7.6 Required if you need to perform the ACL, CoS, CAR or shaping operation
Creating for a specific flow over the port.
Traffic Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

A.7.7.7 Setting Required if a port policy is created.


the Port That Set the related parameters according to the network plan.
Uses the Port
Policy

A.7.7.8 Required if you need to limit the egress bandwidth that an Ethernet service
Configuring occupies.
Port Shaping Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Procedure for Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations

Table 8-14 Procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations

Operation Description

A.7.8.1 Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
Creating an test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
MD l Set Maintenance Domain Name and Maintenance Domain Level to
the same values for the NEs.
l For an Ethernet service between two edge nodes on the transport
network, it is recommended that Maintenance Domain Level takes its
default value of 4. For an Ethernet service between two internal NEs
on the transport network, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value
smaller than 4. For an Ethernet service between two Ethernet ports on
the same NE, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value smaller than
the value that is set in the test of an Ethernet service between two
internal NEs on the transport network.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 201


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Configuration Guide (U2000) 8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Operation Description

A.7.8.2 Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
Creating an test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
MA l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance
Domain Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the same value for the NEs.
l Set Relevant Service to the same service for the NEs.
l It is recommended that you set CC Test Transmit Period to 1s.

A.7.8.3 Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
Creating test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
MEPs l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Board and Port to the Ethernet ports that are involved in the service
test.
l Set MP ID to different values for MEPs in the same MD.
l If the OAM information initiated by the MEP travels through the packet
switching unit on the local NE, set Direction of the MEP to Ingress.
Otherwise, set Direction to Egress.
l Set CC Status to Active, as the MEP ID is used to identify the MEP
during the LB test.

A.7.8.4 Required for the NE where the Ethernet ports involved in the OAM<